Samsung cht-500 cht-2020 dvd-cm500 Training PDF

DVD-VCR COMBINATION
CHT-500
CHT-2020
DVD-CM500
PAL
Main Unit ; DVD-CM500

Speakers ; SP-500
Stand
; ST-500
TRAINING MANUAL
TRAINING
CHT-500/CHT-2020/DVD-CM500
ELECTRONICS
Manual
DVD-VCR COMBINATION
CONTENTS
1. Precautions
2. Reference Information
3. Product Specification
4. Operating Instructions
5. Disassembly and Reassembly
6. Alignment and Adjustment
7. Circuit Operating Description
8. VCR Deck Operating Description
EJECT
SELECT
PHONES
REC
S.MODE EZ VIEW
CHANNEL
9. Troubleshooting
VOL
P.SCAN
10. Block Diagram

11. Wiring Diagram
12. Schematic Diagrams
This Service Manual is a property of Samsung Electronics Co .,Ltd.

Any unauthorized use of Manual can be punished under applicable
International and/or domestic law.
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. JAN. 2004

Printed in Korea
AK82-00499A
IMPORTANT SERVICE GUIDE

MODE SWITCH (PROGRAM SWITCH) ASSEMBLY POINT
1) When installing the assy deck on the Main PCB, be sure to align the assembly point of mode switch.
ASSEMBLY POINT
VCR MAIN PCB
Fig. 1
HOW TO EJECT THE CASSETTE TAPE

(If the tape is stuck in the unit)
1) Turn the Gear Worm clockwise in the direction of arrow with a screwdriver. (See Fig. 2)
(Other method ; Remove the screw of Motor Load Assy, Separate the Motor Load Assy)
2) When Slider S, T approachs the unloading position, rotate holder Clutch counterclockwise after inserting screwdriver in the
frames bottom hole in order to wind the unwound tape. (Refer to Fig. 3)
(If you rotate Gear Worm continuously when tape is unwinding, you may cause tape contamination by grease and
tape damage. Be sure to wind the unwound tape with the unit in the horizontall position.)
3) Rotate Gear Worm clockwise using a screwdriver until the mecha is in the eject state. Remove the tape. (Refer to Fig. 2)
GEAR WORM
FRAME
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
1. Precautions
1-1 Safety Precautions
1) Before returning an instrument to the customer,
always make a safety check of the entire instrument,
including, but not limited to, the following items:
(1) Be sure that no built-in protective devices are
defective or have been defeated during servicing.
(1)Protective shields are provided to protect both
the technician and the customer. Correctly replace
all missing protective shields, including any
removed for servicing convenience.
(2)When reinstalling the chassis and/or other assembly in the cabinet, be sure to put back in place
all protective devices, including, but not limited to,
nonmetallic control knobs, insulating fish papers,
adjustment and compartment covers/shields, and
isolation resistor/capacitor networks. Do not operate this instrument or permit it to be operated without all protective devices correctly installed and
functioning.
(2) Be sure that there are no cabinet openings through
which adults or children might be able to insert
their fingers and contact a hazardous voltage. Such
openings include, but are not limited to, excessively wide cabinet ventilation slots, and an improperly fitted and/or incorrectly secured cabinet back
cover.
(3) Leakage Current Hot Check-With the instrument
completely reassembled, plug the AC line cord
directly into a 120V AC outlet. (Do not use an isolation transformer during this test.) Use a leakage
current tester or a metering system that complies
with American National Standards institute (ANSI)
C101.1 Leakage Current for Appliances and
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1270 (40.7). With
the instruments AC switch first in the ON position
and then in the OFF position, measure from a
known earth ground (metal water pipe, conduit,
etc.) to all exposed metal parts of the instrument
(antennas, handle brackets, metal cabinets, screwheads, metallic overlays, control shafts, etc.), especially any exposed metal parts that offer an electrical return path to the chassis.
Any current measured must not exceed 0.5mA.
Reverse the instrument power cord plug in the outlet and repeat the test. See Fig. 1-1.
Any measurements not within the limits specified

herein indicate a potential shock hazard that must
be eliminated before returning the instrument to
the customer.
(READING SHOULD
NOT BE ABOVE
0.5mA)
LEAKAGE
CURRENT
TESTER
DEVICE
UNDER
TEST
TEST ALL
EXPOSED METER
SURFACES
2-WIRE CORD
ALSO TEST WITH
PLUG REVERSED
(USING AC ADAPTER
PLUG AS REQUIRED)
EARTH
GROUND
Fig. 1-1 AC Leakage Test

(4) Insulation Resistance Test Cold Check-(1) Unplug
the power supply cord and connect a jumper wire
between the two prongs of the plug. (2) Turn on the
power switch of the instrument. (3) Measure the
resistance with an ohmmeter between the
jumpered AC plug and all exposed metallic cabinet
parts on the instrument, such as screwheads,
antenna, control shafts, handle brackets, etc. When
an exposed metallic part has a return path to the
chassis, the reading should be between 1 and 5.2
megohm. When there is no return path to the chassis, the reading must be infinite. If the reading is
not within the limits specified, there is the possibility of a shock hazard, and the instrument must be
repaired and rechecked before it is returned to the
customer. See Fig. 1-2.
Antenna
Terminal
Exposed
Metal Part
ohm
ohmmeter
Fig. 1-2 Insulation Resistance Test

Samsung Electronics
1-1
Precautions
2) Read and comply with all caution and safety related notes on or inside the cabinet, or on the chassis.
3) Design Alteration Warning-Do not alter or add to
the mechanical or electrical design of this instrument. Design alterations and additions, including
but not limited to, circuit modifications and the
addition of items such as auxiliary audio output
connections, might alter the safety characteristics of
this instrument and create a hazard to the user. Any
design alterations or additions will make you, the
servicer, responsible for personal injury or property
damage resulting therefrom.
4) Observe original lead dress. Take extra care to
assure correct lead dress in the following areas:
(1) near sharp edges, (2) near thermally hot parts (be
sure that leads and components do not touch thermally hot parts), (3) the AC supply, (4) high voltage,
and (5) antenna wiring. Always inspect in all areas
for pinched, out-of-place, or frayed wiring, Do not
change spacing between a component and the
printed-circuit board. Check the AC power cord for
damage.
1-2
5) Components, parts, and/or wiring that appear to

have overheated or that are otherwise damaged
should be replaced with components, parts and/ or
wiring that meet original specifications.
Additionally, determine the cause of overheating
and/or damage and, if necessary, take corrective
action to remove any potential safety hazard.
6) Product Safety Notice-Some electrical and mechanical parts have special safety-related characteristics
which are often not evident from visual inspection,
nor can the protection they give necessarily be
obtained by replacing them with components rated
for higher voltage, wattage, etc. Parts that have special safety characteristics are identified by shading,
an (
)or a (
)on schematics and parts lists. Use
of a substitute replacement that does not have the
same safety characteristics as the recommended
replacement part might create shock, fire and/or
other hazards. Product safety is under review continuously and new instructions are issued whenever appropriate.
Samsung Electronics
Precautions
1-2 Servicing Precautions

CAUTION : Before servicing units covered
by this service manual and its supplements, read and
follow the Safety Precautions section of this manual.
Note : If unforseen circumstances create conflict
between the following servicing precautions and any
of the safety precautions, always follow the safety precautions. Remember: Safety First.
1-2-1 General Servicing Precautions

(1) a. Always unplug the instruments AC power cord
from the AC power source before (1) re-moving
or reinstalling any component, circuit board,
module or any other instrument assembly, (2)
disconnecting any instrument electrical plug or
other electrical connection, (3) connecting a test
substitute in parallel with an electrolytic capacitor in the instrument.
b. Do not defeat any plug/socket B+ voltage interlocks with which instruments covered by this
service manual might be equipped.
c. Do not apply AC power to this instrument and
/or any of its electrical assemblies unless all
solid-state device heat sinks are correctly installed.
d. Always connect a test instruments ground lead
to the instrument chassis ground before connecting the test instrument positive lead. Always
remove the test instrument ground lead last.
(4) An insulation tube or tape is sometimes used and

some components are raised above the printed
wiring board for safety. The internal wiring is
sometimes clamped to prevent contact with heating components. Install such elements as they
were.
(5) After servicing, always check that the removed
screws, components, and wiring have been installed correctly and that the portion around the
serviced part has not been damaged and so on.
Further, check the insulation between the blades of
the attachment plug and accessible conductive
parts.
1-2-2 Insulation Checking Procedure

Disconnect the attachment plug from the AC outlet
and turn the power ON. Connect the insulation resistance meter (500V) to the blades of the attachment
plug. The insulation resistance between each blade of
the attachment plug and accessible conductive
parts(see note) should be more than 1 Megohm.
Note : Accessible conductive parts include metal panels, input terminals, earphone jacks, etc.
Note : Refer to the Safety Precautions section ground

lead last.
(2) The service precautions are indicated or printed on
the cabinet, chassis or components. When servicing, follow the printed or indicated service precautions and service materials.
(3) The components used in the unit have a specified
flame resistance and dielectric strength.
When replacing components, use components
which have the same ratings. Components identified by shading, by( ) or by ( ) in the circuit diagram are important for safety or for the characteristics of the unit. Always replace them with the exact
replacement components.
Samsung Electronics
1-3
Precautions
1-3 ESD Precautions

Electrostatically Sensitive Devices (ESD)
Some semiconductor (solid state) devices can be damaged easily by static electricity.
Such components commonly are called Electrostatically Sensitive Devices(ESD). Examples of typical ESD
devices are integrated circuits and some field-effect
transistors and semiconductor chip components. The
following techniques should be used to help reduce
the incidence of component damage caused by static
electricity.
(1) Immediately before handling any semiconductor
component or semiconductor-equipped assembly,
drain off any electrostatic charge on your body by
touching a known earth ground. Alternatively,
obtain and wear a commercially available discharging wrist strap device, which should be
removed for potential shock reasons prior to applying power to the unit under test.
(7) Immediately before removing the protective materials from the leads of a replacement ESD device,
touch the protective material to the chassis or circuit assembly into which the device will be
installed.
CAUTION : Be sure no power is applied to the chassis or circuit, and observe all other safety precautions.
(8) Minimize bodily motions when handling unpackaged replacement ESD devices. (Otherwise harmless motion such as the brushing together of your
clothes fabric or the lifting of your foot from a carpeted floor can generate static electricity sufficient
to damage an ESD device).
(2) After removing an electrical assembly equipped

with ESD devices, place the assembly on a conductive surface such as aluminum foil, to prevent electrostatic charge buildup or exposure of the assembly.
(3) Use only a grounded-tip soldering iron to solder or
unsolder ESD devices.
(4) Use only an anti-static solder removal devices.
Some solder removal devices not classified as
anti-static can generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ESD devices.
(5) Do not use freon-propelled chemicals. These can
generate electrical charges sufficient to damage
ESD devices.
(6) Do not remove a replacement ESD device from its
protective package until immediately before your
are ready to install it.(Most replacement ESD
devices are packaged with leads electrically shorted together by conductive foam, aluminum foil or
comparable conductive materials).
1-4
Samsung Electronics
Precautions
1-4 Handling the optical pick-up

The laser diode in the optical pick up may suffer electrostatic breakdown because of potential static electricity from clothing and your body.
WRIST-STRAP
FOR GROUNDING
1M
The following method is recommended.

(1) Place a conductive sheet on the work bench (The
black sheet used for wrapping repair parts.)
(2) Place the set on the conductive sheet so that the
chassis is grounded to the sheet.
(3) Place your hands on the conductive sheet(This
gives them the same ground as the sheet.)
(4) Remove the optical pick up block
(5) Perform work on top of the conductive sheet. Be
careful not to let your clothes or any other static
sources to touch the unit.
THE UNIT
1M
CONDUCTIVE SHEET
Fig.1-3
(6) Short the short terminal on the PCB, which is inside the Pick-Up ASSY, before replacing the PickUp. (The short terminal is shorted when the PickUp Assy is being lifted or moved.)
(7) After replacing the Pick-up, open the short terminal on the PCB.
Be sure to put on a wrist strap grounded to the

sheet.
Be sure to lay a conductive sheet made of copper
etc. Which is grounded to the table.
Samsung Electronics
1-5
Precautions
1-5 Pick-up disassembly and reassembly

1-5-1 Disassembly
1-5-2 Assembly
1) Remove the power cord.

2) Disassemble the Deck-Assy.
3) Make solder land 2 points short on Pick-up.
(See Fig. 1-4)
4) Disassemble the Pick-up.
1) Replace the Pick-up.

2) Remove the soldering 2 points on Pick-up.
3) Reassemble the Deck-Assy.
Note : If the assembly and disassembly are not done in correct sequence, the Pick-up may be damaged.
SOLDER LAND 2 POINTS SHORT
PICK-UP ASS'Y
Fig. 1-4
1-6
Samsung Electronics
2. Reference Information
2-1 Introduction to DVD
2-1-1 The Definition of DVD
DVD is the next generation medium and is the acronym of the Digital Versatile Disc or thr Digital Video Disc,
which maximizes the saving density of the disk surface using the MPEG-2 compression technology to enable the
storage of 17G bytes of data on the same size CD.
1) 7 times the storage capacity of the conventional CD
Minimized the track pitch and pit size to 1/2 of conventional CD.
Uses red laser with short-wavelenght of 650nm (635nm).
DVD Vs. CD-ROM
DVD
Single-Layer
CD-ROM
Dual-Layer
Laser Wavelength
650nm (635nm)
780nm
Track Pitch
0.75um
1.6um
Disc Diameter
120mm
Disc Thickness
Linear Velocity
1.2 (0.6 x 2) mm
3.49m/s
1.2mm
3.84m/s
1.2 ~ 1.4m/s
2) Disc Formats
DVD consists of two 0.6mm discs attached together, enabling access to the upper and lower side of the disk,
and 4 sides could be used at maximum.
Single Layer : 4.7GByte

Label
Polycarbonate
Bonding layer
Reflective layer
Polycarbonate
Dual Side Single Layer : 9.5GByte

Polycarbonate
Reflective layer
Bonding layer
Reflective layer
Polycarbonate
Samsung Electronics
Dual Layer : 8.5GByte

Label
Polycarbonate
Reflective layer
Bonding layer
Semi-reflective layer
Polycarbonate
Dual Side Dual Layer : 17GByte
Polycarbonate
Reflective layer
Bonding layer
Reflective layer
Polycarbonate
2-1
Reference Information
2-1-2 DVD Types

FORMAT
TYPE
DVD-Video
Playback Only
DVD-ROM
Read Only
DVD-Audio
Playback Only
DVD-R
1 Time Recording
DVD-RAM
Rewritable
2-2
APPLICATIONS
High quality image and sound for movies and other video media.
Multi-functional, multi-midia software that requires large storage capacity.
High quality sound that exceeds the CD, multi-channel Audio.
Storage media for the computer.
Data access/storage media for the computer.
Samsung Electronics
2-2 DVD-Video Fromat

2-2-1 Main Features
1) Able to store up to 160 minutes of Movie by utilizing the MPEG-2 compression technology. ( Aver. 133min.)
2) Enables more than 500 lines of horizontal resolution. (Class corresponding to the Master Tapes used in
broadcasting stations)
3) Provides Dolby Digital 5.1ch Surround 3D sound, which enables theater quality sound (NTSC area).
For PAL areas, 1 of either MPEG-2 Audio or Dolby Digital must be selected.
4) Multi-Language
Able to store up to 8 languages of dubbing.
Able to store up to 32 subtitle languages.
5) Milti-Aspect Ratio
3TV Mode alternatives ; 16:9 Wide Screen (DVD Basic)/4:3 Pan & Scan/Letter Box.
6) Multi-Story
Possible to implement Interactive Viewing which enables the user to select the scenario.
7) Multi-Angle
Able to view the camera angle you selected among the scenes recorded with multiple camera angles.
Note ; The above media features must have the DVD Title that contains the appropriate contents to function
properly.
2-2-2 Audio & Video Specifications

Classification
VIDEO
DVD-Video
Video-CD
Compression
MPEG-2
MPEG-1
Pixel
720 x 480
352 x 240
Horizontal resolution
Max. 500 Lines
Max. 250 Lines
Compression rate
1/40
1/140
Transmission speed
Max. 9.8Mbps (variable)
1.15Mbps (fixed)
TV aspect
16:9 / 4:3
4:3
4:3
Audio
Max. 8 streams
2CH stereo
2 Analog CH.
2 Digital CH.
(16Bit/44.1KHz)
Recording type
AUDIO
Dolby Digital
Linear PCM
MPEG-1 Layer 2
Transmission rate
448Kbps/stream
6.144Mbps/stream
224Kbps
Channel
5.1CH/stream
8CH/stream
2CH
Sampling frequency
48KHz
16, 20, 24Bit/48, 96KHz
16Bit/44.1KHz
Samsung Electronics
LD
Analog
Max.420 Lines
Analog
or
1 Analog CH.
1 Stream of Dolby Digital
2 Digital CH.
(16Bit/44.1KHz)
2-3
2-2-3 Detailed Feature

DVD-Video Feature 1
When Developing the DVD Software, various addition and modification is possible.
As the storage capacity increases, the DVD-Video separates the main data and the additional data such as the
Multi-Function into different data areas, enabling the control of time-data ratio to provide the format that enables
the flexible Software development
1 Movie (3.5Mbps)
+ Subtitle (1 Language)
+ Surround Audio (1 Language)
= 160min storage (4.673Gbytes)
1 Movie (3.5Mbps)
+ Subtitle (4 Language)
+ Surround Audio (4 Language)
1 Music Video (4Mbps)
+ 2ch High quality Audio (96kHz/24bit)
DVD-Video Feature 2
Application of the MPEG-2 compression technology.
DVD-Video uses the variable compresion technology, the MPEG-2 to compress the moving image optimally, minimizing the Data loss to Provide a clear, natural screen while increasing the storage time.
DVD-Video
Video-CD
MPEG-2 (Variable compression : Max. 1/40)

Field unit compression.
Compression rate change according to the amount of Data.
Differentiates the still image anf the moving image
compression rete, reducing Data loss and enables
efficient compression.
Amount of data
MPEG-1 (Fixed compression : Max. 1/140)

Frame unit compression.
Compresses all data using the same ratio.
Amount of data
- Fast movements are jagged, and unnatural
2-4
Time
Loss area
Time
Samsung Electronics
DVD-Video Feature 3
High quality surround audio.
DVD-Video can store the audio using the 5.1ch Dolby Digital compression or the advanced Liner PCM method,
providing the better-than-CD quality and theater like audio quality.
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Unlike the traditional Dolby pro-Logic method, the Dolby Digital method separates all 5 main channels
(Front L/R, Center, Surround (Rear) L/R)and the Sub woofer to provide live surround audio.
Using the Down Mix method, the conventional Dolby Pro-Logic and Stereo are all compatible.
Each separated channels are played back at CD quality sound. (Frequency band: 20Hz ~ 20KHz)
Linear PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
Provides the high quality Digital sound without the audio data compression.
Various Digital Recordings are possible as shown in the table to the right.
Sampling Frequency
Bit Rate
16bit
48KHz
20bit
24bit
16bit
96KHz
20bit
24bit
Dolby Digital compatible Audio Mode

Channel Format
Audio Coding
Mode
Front
L
1/0
3/0
2/1
3/1
2/2
3/2
Mono
O
Remark
2/0
Samsung Electronics
Surround (Rear)
Stereo
O
O
Mono
Mono
Surround
2-5
DVD-Video Feature 4
Multi-Language
Audio Dubbing - Max. 8 Languages

Subtitle - Max. 32 Languages. Capable of storing, and selectiong.
Linear PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
DVD-Video Feature 5
Multi-Aspect
Unlike the conventional VCD or LD, DVD-Video has the default of 16:9 Wide, and can be viewed using the
conventional 4:3 TV, enabling the expansion of viewer selection capabilities.
16 : 9 TV : Wide Mode (16:9 Wide Full Screen)
4 : 3 TV : Letter Box Mode, Pan & Scan Mode
16:9 Wide
4:3 Pan & Scan
4:3 Letter Box
Note ; Only enable to be worked correctly by an appropriate data supported this function in Disc.
DVD-Video Feature 6
Multi-Angle
Up to 9 angles of view may be stored, enabling the viewer to select a specific viewpoint at a given time.
--> Especially, for the Music Video and Sports Title, this provides a more lively image of the scene.
Note ; Only enable to be worked correctly by an appropriate data supported this function in Disc.
2-6
Samsung Electronics
DVD-Video Feature 7
Multi-Story
DVD-Video provides the enviroment suitable for the bi-directional Software develoment, providing multiple
scenarios. This feature enables the Multi-Story function.
OPTION
Parental Lock
For the titles that are not suitable for children viewing, Parental Locks are set, requesting user defined
passwords for viewing
Parential Locks may be set on specific frames of the Title, enabling the player to skip those frames during
playback.
COPYRIGHT
Regional Code & Macrovision
Classify the world into 6 regions, and if the DVD Title and the Players Reginal Code do not agree, playback
is prohibited.
Regionnal Coding is optional for the Soft developers (Region 0 All Code), but the Hardware developers
must adopt the appropriate regionnal code for sale.
Region 1 : The United States and its territories, Canada.
Region 2 : Europe, Japan, Greenland, Egypt, South Africa, the Middle East.
Region 3 : Taiwan, Hongkong, Korea, South East Asia.
Region 4 : Mexico, South America, Australia, New Zealand.
Region 5 : Russia, Eastern Europe, India, Africa.
Region 6 : China.
Region 0 : Worldwide (All Code)
Adoptation of the Macrovision System disables the copying on to other media.
Samsung Electronics
2-7
Remark
DVD-Video Authoring Process
The image quality of the DVD-Video may vary accoring to the quality of the Master and the Authoring Process
The image quality of the DVD-Video varies according to the Digital Mastering Source such as the
conventional LD, VCD, or Original Film.
Different Authoring Process are used accoring to the Software developers, and this may affect the
DVD image quality.
Authoring Process
Video/Audio
Master
MPEG-2
Encoding
Surround Audio
Master
AC-3/MPEG Audio
Encoding
Subtitle
Master
Subtitle
Encoding
bit stream
Disc
Production
bit stream
Video/Audio
Subtitle
Multiplexing
Cutting
Master
bit stream
Authoring Process
2-8
Samsung Electronics
3. Product Specification
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
AUDIO
2 Stereo audio inputs, RCA connector, -8dBm, 47Kohm
VIDEO
2 composite video inputs, RCA connector, 75ohm, 1Vp-p
RF
Antenna or CATV Input, F-Connector, 75ohm
AUDIO
1 Stereo audio output, RCA Connector, -8dbm, 1.5Kohm
VIDEO
1 Composite video output, RCA Connector, 75ohm, 1Vp-p
VIDEO (DVD only)
1 S-Video output, S-Connector, 75ohm, Y=1.0Vp-p, C=0.286Vp-p

1 Component video output, 75ohm, Y=1.0Vp-p, Pb=0.7Vp-p, Pr=0.7Vp-p
RF
Channel 3 or 4
VIDEO SYSTEM
1/2-inch VHS system, 4 rotary head helical scanning;

FM azimuth liminance;chrominance:converted sub system phase shift
VCR
AUDIO TRACk
Normal : 1 track, Hi-Fi : 2 track
PLAY/RECORD TIME
T-180 tape : SP 3 hours, SLP 9 hours
FF/REW TIME
T-120 tape : <2 minutes>
HEADS
Video : DA 4 rotary
AUDIO : 2 rotary heads (Hi-Fi) ; 1 stationary head (Linear)
Control : 1 stationary head
Erase : 1 full track, 1 audio track
WOW & FLUTTER
Less than 0.005% (Hi-Fi)
FREQ. RESPONSE
20~20,2000Hz (Hi-Fi)
DISC COMPATIBILITY
CD, CD-R, CD-R/W, DVD-Video, CD-Digital Audio (5 and 3.5)

WMA, MP3 files on CD-ROM
DVD
SYSTEM
S/N RATIO
110dB
DYNAMIC RANGE
100dB
POWER REQUIREMENT
120V AC, 60Hz, 96W
ENVIRONMENT
41-104F (5-40C) ; 10%-75% humidity
WEIGHT
13.0Ibs (Combo) +22.5Ibs (Speaker) =35.5Ibs

FM
AM
15dB
64dB
S/N RATIO
60dB
35dB
THD
0.5%
2%
SENSITIVITY
RECEIVER
AMP
Samsung Electronics
FREQ. RESPONSE
20Hz ~ 20KHz
S/N RATIO
75dB
CHANNEL SEPERATION
50dB
3-1
Product Specification
SPEAKER SYSTEM
5.1 CHANNEL SPEAKER SYSTEM

FRONT/CENTER/SURROUND
SUBWOOFER SPEAKER
6ohm x 5
3ohm
IMPEDANCE
FREQ. RESPONSE
SPEAKER
140Hz~20000KHz
O.S.L.
77dB/W/M
FRONT
SIZE
SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
WEIGHT
SURROUND
CENTER
3-2
92(W) x 153(D) x 87.5(H)
40Hz~900Hz
83dB/W/M
250(W) x 250(D) x 380(H)
153(W) x 104(D) x 92(H)

0.79 Kg , 0.74Kg
6.7Kg
0.83Kg
Samsung Electronics
4. Operating Instructions
CHT-500 (SCART Jack)
Samsung Electronics
4-1
4-2
GB
Audio
Audio
+
Video
Audio
+
Video
8 Cm
12 Cm
8 Cm
12 Cm
8 Cm
12 Cm
Recording Disc Size

Types
20 min.
74 min.
20 min.
74 min.
Single-sided
240 min.
Double-sided
480 min.
Single-sided
80 min.
Double-sided
160 min.
Max.
Playing
Time
An LP is recorded as an analog
signal with more distortion. CD
is recorded as a Digital Signal
with better audio quality, less
distortion and less deterioration
of audio quality over time.
Video with CD sound, VHS

quality & MPEG-1 compression
technology.
DVD contains excellent sound

and video due to Dolby Digital
and MPEG-2 system.
Various screen and audio
functions can be easily selected
through the on-screen menu.
Characteristics
PAL colour
system in U.K,
France, Germany,
etc.
Stereo
NTSC broadcast Dolby
Digital disc disc
system in USA,
Canada, japan,
South Korea, etc.
NTSC
STEREO
Digital
Audio disc
DIGITAL
SOUND
DTS disc
Both the DVD player and the discs are coded by region. These regional codes must match in order for the
disc to play. If the codes do not match, the disc will not play.
The Region Number for this player is described on the rear panel of the player.
Playback Region Number
Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Playback
Region
Number
PAL
Disc Markings
* DO NOT play CD-ROM, CD-I and DVD-ROM in this player!

(CDGs play audio only, not graphics.)
* It may not be to play CD-R,CD-RW and DVD-R in all cases due to the type of disc or condition of the
recording.
AUDIO-CD
VIDEO-CD
DVD
Disc Types
(Logos)
This DVD player is capable of playing the following types of discs with the corresponding logos :
Disc Type and Characteristics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S.MODE
COPY
DVD DECK
DVD OPEN/CLOSE
VCR DECK
VCR EJECT
STANDBY/ON
HEADPHONE JACK
STOP
REW/SKIP BACK BUTTON
PLAY/STILL
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
REC
1
2
3
4
5
6
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
IN
VIDEO
AUX
OUT
AUDIO
9 10
RADIO ANT.
DVD & VCR
11
RF ANTENNA INPUT
RADIO FM ANTENNA INPUT
AUX AUDIO L, R IN/OUT SOCKETS
AV2 (DEC./EXT.) SCART (EURO-21) SOCKET
COOLING FAN
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
RF
Rear View of the DVD-VCR
STANDBY/ON PHONES
Front View of the DVD-VCR
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
12
7
8
9
10
11
14
P.SCAN
17
12
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DVD Only
SURROUND R
FRONT R
F.F/SKIP NEXT BUTTON

RECORD
SOUND MODE
COPY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
PROGRAMME /
PROGRESSIVE SCAN
SELECT DIAL
VOLUME DIAL
15 16
PROG
SELECT
SURROUND L
FRONT L
SPEAKERS
CENTER
WOOFER
18
VOL
EJECT
5.1CH SPEAKER OUT

RF OUT TO TV
RADIO AM ANTENNA INPUT
VIDEO IN/OUT SOCKETS
AV1 (EURO AV) IN/OUT SCART (EURO-21)
SOCKET
S-VIDEO OUT
GB
Operating Instructions
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
22
23
24
4
5
18
19
14
15
16
17
13
12
11
7
8
9
10
42
36
37
38
39
40
41
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
26
25
21
20
Infrared Remote Control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
STANDBY/ON
SHUTTLE<< / >>
ANGLE/IPC
DVD SELECT
VCR SELECT
TV VOLUME
OPEN/CLOSE, EJECT
EZ VIEW
REWIND, SKIP BACK
STOP
DISC MENU
MENU
LEFT
RECORD
TEST
SPEAKER
TV/VCR
MODE, REPEAT
TITLE, SPEED
TV STANDBY/ON
0-9
ZOOM, INPUT SELECT
TV SELECT
FM/AM SELECT
AMP VOLUME
PROG/TRK ( , )
AUDIO
MUTE
FAST-FORWARD, SKIP NEXT
PLAY/STILL
CLEAR
RETURN, A.DUB
UP
OK
RIGHT
DOWN
INFO.
BASS
SOUND MODE
TREBLE
MARK, SEARCH
SUBTITLE, TIMER
BATTERIES
REMOTE CONTROL
8 The Hi-Fi track of a VHS videotape is playing or

the current TV program or video is broadcast in
Stereo.
9 Timer Recording is in progress. When it blinks
an error has occurred. When recording is on, it
displays without the clock hands. It also blinks
when you pause the VCR.
10 COPY mode indicator
AM ANTENNA CABLE
COAXIAL CABLE
FM ANTENNA CABLE
AUDIO & VIDEO CABLE OWNERS INSTRUCTIONS
You have just purchased a SAMSUNG Video Cassette Recorder (DVD-VCR).

Together with your DVD-VCR, you will find the following accessories in the box.
Accessories
1 The DVD Deck is active.

2 DVD or CD media is loaded.
3 The time, counter position, time remaining or current
deck status is indicated.
4 Recording is in progress (normal and timer).
5 VHS videotape is loaded.
6 The VCR Deck is active.
7 A DVD with a DTS soundtrack is loaded.
Display Indicators
10
GB
4-3
4-4
GB
IN
Rear
Rear
S-VIDEO OUT
Rear
10
75
coaxial
coaxial
75
coaxial
75
S-JACK
RCA
Aux
Audio/Video
Audio RCA
In
In
Out
Out
Out
In
Out
In
In/Out
Direction
AM Antenna
FM Antenna
Cable television network

Satellite receiver
Aerial
Television
S-Video out (DVD only)
Video out
Audio in
Video in
Audio out
Satellite receiver
Other VCR
Television
Satellite receiver
Other VCR
Recommended Use
Refer to the documentation supplied with your equipment for detailed connection instructions
and associated safety precautions.
Whenever you connect an audio or video system to your DVD-VCR, ensure that all elements
are switched off.
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
FM/AM Antenna Rear

Input
IN FROM ANT. Rear
OUT TO TV
S-VIDEO
output
EO
VIDEO output Rear
AUX
OUT
Rear
Audio output
SCART
Rear
AV2 IN
Type
SCART
Location
AV1 (EURO AV) Rear
Connector
Your DVD-VCR is equipped with the following connectors.
Systems connected permanently to the DVD-VCR (satellite receiver for example) or

temporarily (camcorder for example)
Types of connectors available on your systems
You must take into account various factors when connecting audio or video systems:
Deciding How to Connect DVD-VCR
Plug the other end of the coaxial cable into the connector
previously used for the aerial on the television.
To obtain better pictures and sound quality on your television,
you can also connect your DVD-VCR to the television via the
SCART cable (see section below) if your television is equipped
with this type of connection.
4
5
TV
RF
RF
RF
DVD & VCR
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
IN
VIDEO
AUX
OUT
AUDIO
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
DVD & VCR
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
AUX
OUT
OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUX
AUDIO
VIDEO
IN
IN
DVD & VCR
RADIO ANT.
Plug the other end into the appropriate connector on the television.
Connect one end of the SCART cable to the AV1 (EURO AV) socket on the rear of the DVD-VCR.
2
3
Connect the coaxial cable as indicated in the above section.
11
Make sure that both the television and the DVD-VCR are switched off before connecting the
cables.
Regardless of the type of connection chosen, you must always connect the coaxial cable
supplied. Otherwise, no picture will be visible on the screen when the DVD-VCR is switched
off.
You can connect your DVD-VCR to the television using the SCART cable if the appropriate input is available
on the television. You thus:
Obtain better quality sound and pictures
Simplify the setting up procedure of your DVD-VCR
SCART Cable
RF coaxial cable
TV
Aerial
Connecting DVD-VCR to the TV using the SCART Cable
socket on your
Plug the coaxial cable supplied into the

DVD-VCR.
3
TV
Connect this cable to the 75 coaxial socket marked

the rear of your DVD-VCR.
on
Remove the aerial or network input cable from the television.
Make sure that both the television and the DVD-VCR

are switched off before connecting the cables.
An outdoor aerial
An indoor aerial
A cable television network
A satellite receiver
To receive television programmes a signal must be received from

one of the following sources:
Connecting DVD-VCR to the TV using the Coaxial Cable
GB
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
GB
SCART Cable
RF
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
DVD & VCR
IN
VIDEO
AUX
OUT
AUDIO
Aerial Connector
Aerial
12
RF coaxial cable
TV
SCART Cable
RF
Satellite Receiver or other Equipment
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
DVD & VCR

IN
VIDEO
AUX
OUT
AUDIO
Aerial Connector
Aerial
After making this connection, you must preset the station received through the satellite tuner.
RF output channel of the satellite receiver should be adjusted away from channel 36, which is used by the
DVD-VCR, e.g. re-adjust to channel 39.
2. By means of RF Coaxial Cable
Plug the SCART Cable with satellite receiver or other equipment into the AV2 (DEC./EXT.) socket on the rear of
the DVD-VCR.
After making this connection, select the source by pressing the INPUT SEL. button for the AV2 input sources.
1. AV2 IN: By means of 21-pin Scart Cable
RF coaxial cable
TV
Satellite Receiver or other Equipment
Press OK to start the auto scanning.

The number of stations automatically stored by the VCR
depends on the number of stations that it has found.
Auto preset can be performed by pressing STOP ( ) on

the VCR continuously for 5 seconds or more with no
tape inserted.
The current time and date are displayed automatically.

Check the date and time.
if it is :
Correct, Press RETURN button twice to exit the menu.
incorrect, see page 17.
Press the or buttons to select your country.

The VCR searches for the stations according to a preset
preference list corresponding to the country that you have
selected.
Press OK to store the language selected.

Result:
A message appears.
4
Press OK button.
Select the required language by pressing the or buttons.
Plug the DVD-VCR into the mains.

Result:
The Language Set menu is displayed.
2. By means of RF Coaxial Cable
After making this connection, you must preset the station received through the satellite tuner.
RF output channel of the satellite receiver should be adjusted away from channel 36, which is used by the
DVD-VCR, e.g. re-adjust to channel 39.
1
Connect the coaxial cable as indicated on page 11.
(Connecting Your DVD-VCR to the TV Using the Coaxial Cable)
Your DVD-VCR will automatically set itself up when it is plugged

into the mains for the first time. TV stations will be stored in
memory. The process takes a few minutes. Your DVD-VCR will
then be ready for use.
Plug & Auto Set up
Plug the SCART Cable with satellite receiver or other equipment into the AV1 (EURO AV) socket on the rear of the
DVD-VCR.
After making this connection, select the source by pressing the INPUT SEL. button for the AV1 input sources.
1. AV1(EURO AV): By means of 21-pin Scart Cable
You can connect your DVD-VCR to a Satellite receiver or other DVD-VCR using the SCART cable if the
appropriate outputs are available on the equipment chosen. The following illustrations give a few
examples of the connection possibilities.
Connecting DVD-VCR to a Satellite Receiver or Other Equipment
TV
Auto Clock
Time
12 : 00
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
: On
IN
VIDEO
AUX
OUT
AUDIO
13
Clock Set
00 %
Auto setup
Date
Year
1 / JAN / 2004 THU
Please wait
RF
DVD & VCR
RADIO ANT.
GB
4-5
4-6
GB
14
When the picture and sound are perfectly clear, store this
channel at the desired programme position on the television.
Result:
That programme is now reserved for use with your
DVD-VCR.
Start a scan on your television or set the television to UHF

channel 36.
If you cannot find the pictures and sound, or there is interference

from nearby channels, it may be necessary to change the setting
of the DVD-VCR output channel (see Setting the DVD-VCR
Output Channel on page 23 and Problems and Solutions on
page 74).
Insert the video cassette in the DVD-VCR. Check that the

DVD-VCR starts reading the cassette; if not, press II button.
Select a programme position on the television to be reserved for

use with your DVD-VCR.
Fine tune the television until the pictures and sound are obtained
clearly.
Switch on the DVD-VCR by pressing STANDBY/ON on the front

of the DVD-VCR or STANDBY/ON on the remote control.
Switch on the television.
To view pictures from your DVD-VCR when a Scart

cable is used, the television must be set to the
audio/video mode (AV).
You must tune your television for the DVD-VCR only if you are
not using a Scart cable
Tuning Your Television for the DVD-VCR
INPUT SEL. BUTTON

Press the INPUT SEL. button repeatedly to cycle through all of
your input sources, including the Tuner (PR##), AV1 (rear AV
input), AV2 (rear AV input), AUX (rear AV input).
It is only available when VCR deck is selected.
Before using the DVD operation of 46~66 pages, press

the DVD button on the remote control to select and
watch DVD.
Before using the VCR operation of 19~45 pages, press

the VCR button on the remote control to select VCR
mode.
VCR Button
Press the VCR button on remote control when you want to
control the VCR deck.
The VCR indicator will light on the Front Panel Display to
show that VHS deck is selected.
DVD Button
Press the DVD button on the remote control when you want to
control the DVD deck.
The DVD indicator will light on the Front Panel Display to
show that the DVD deck is selected.
STANDBY/ON Button
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the remote control or front
panel to turn on the DVD-VCR.
The DVD-VCR uses one set of controls to operate both decks.

The following keys are helpful in successfully controlling each
deck.
Deck Control Keys
STANDBY/ON PHONES
15
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
PROG
Button
Press to change to the next or previous channel.
0-9 Buttons
Press to select channels directly.
INFO.
Press to display the channel you are watching.
Also works in DVD and VCR mode.
TV/VCR Button
Press to switch between your TVs tuner and the VCRs internal
tuner.
16
Replace the cover by aligning it with the base of the remote

control and pushing it back into place.
Do not mix different battery types (manganese and

alkaline for example).
Insert two AAA, RO3 or equivalent batteries, taking care to

respect the polarities:
+ on the battery with + on the remote control
on the battery with on the remote control
Push the tab in the direction of the arrow to release the battery
compartment cover on the rear of the remote control.
Find that the remote control is no longer working

correctly
Purchase the DVD-VCR
You must insert or replace the batteries in the remote control

when you:
Inserting Batteries in the Remote Control
The following buttons are used when watching television via the
DVD-VCRs built-in TV tuner.
Basic TV Tuner Operations
Stop the Copy Process

When the DVD is finished playing, press the VCR button on the
remote control and then press the STOP button to end the copy.
You must stop the Copy process manually when the DVD
movie ends or the DVD may replay and record over and over
again.
The NTSC DVD or VCD Copy process can not active.
Copy the DVD to VHS Tape

Press the COPY button on the DVD-VCR front panel.
The DVD will go into Play mode and the VCR will go into
Record mode.
Insert VHS Tape

Insert a blank VHS videotape into the VCR deck.
INSERT DISC
Insert the disc you wish to copy in the DVD deck and close the
drawer.
If the DVD you are attempting to copy is copy

protected, you will not be able to copy the disc. It is not
permitted to copy Macrovision encoded DVDs.
The DVD-VCR allows you to copy the contents of a DVD to a

VHS tape with a press of the COPY button.
Copying from DVD to VCR
ON PHONES
STANDBY/ON PHONES
STANDBY/ON PHONES
REC
REC
S.MODE
S.MODE
COPY
COPY
REC
S.MODE
COPY
PROG
PROG
P.SCAN
P.SCAN
SELECT
SELECT
EJECT
17
VOL
EJECT
VOL
GB
4-7
4-8
GB
Clock Set
: On
Date
Year
1 / JAN / 2004 THU
: Off
: On
: English
On completion, press RETURN three times to exit the menu.
18
English
Franais
Deutsch
Espaol
Italiano
Nederlands
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Language Set
: Off
: On
: English
On completion, press RETURN twice to exit the menu.
Place the selection arrow next to your desired Language, then

press the OK button.
Set menu Language
Use the or buttons to highlight

Language, then press the OK or .
Select Language
After pressing the MENU, press the OK or .
Open MENU
Press the or to select On/Off, if you select Auto Clock.

Result:
The selected On/Off is displayed.
You can hold the or buttons down to scroll more

quickly through the values.
Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the value.

Result:
The day of the week is displayed automatically.
Press or to select the hour, minutes, day, month and year,

Auto Clock.
Result:
The option selected highlight.
Press the OK or to select this option.

Result:
The Clock Set menu is displayed.
buttons to select the Clock
Press the corresponding

option.
2
,

Result:
The Setup menu is displayed.
Do not forget to reset the time when you change

clocks from winter to summer time and vice versa.
You must set the date and time when:

You purchase the DVD-VCR
Setting the Menu Language
Auto Clock
Time
12 : 00
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Your DVD-VCR contains a 24-hour clock and calendar used to:

Automatically stop programme recording
Preset your DVD-VCR to record a programme
automatically
Setting the Date and Time

You do not need to preset the stations if you have already
set them automatically (see Plug & Auto Set Up on page 13).
Press the corresponding or buttons, until the Auto

Result: The Please Wait indication highlight on the
television screen.
The first frequency band is scanned and the first
station found is displayed and stored.
The DVD-VCR then searches for the second station
and so on.
When the automatic scanning procedure has
finished, the DVD-VCR switches automatically to
programme 1.
Once the auto scanning procedure has finished, some

stations may have been stored more than once; select
the stations with the best reception and delete the
ones no longer required (see page 21).
If you wish to cancel the auto scanning before the end, press the
MENU button to exit the menu.
The number of stations automatically stored by the DVDVCR depends on the number of stations that it has found.
Press OK button.
Result: A message appears, indicating that any channels
already preset on your VCR will be deleted.
Press the or buttons to select your country.

The VCR searches for the stations according to a preset
preference list corresponding to the country that you have
selected.
And then press the OK or to select this option.

Result: The country selection is displayed.
Setup is selected.

Result:
The Install menu is displayed.
Press the corresponding , buttons to select the Install

option.
2
3

Result:
You must preset the stations received through the tuner. This can
be done:
Plug & Auto Set up (see page 13)
Automatically
Manually (see page 20)
You can store up to 80 stations.
Your DVD-VCR contains a built-in tuner used to receive television

broadcasts.
Presetting the Stations Automatically
Please Wait
Your data will be lost

Press OK to continue
Menu to exit
Manual Setup
TV System
VCR Output CH
Auto Setup
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Install
15%
19
Auto Setup
Auto Setup
:G
: CH 36
: Off
: On
: English
VCR
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
: ---
: -
: ----
CH
MFT
NAME
MEMORY : OK
RETURN
: 1
PR
20
NAME
:G
: CH 36
Install
SWAPPING : OK
RETURN
MANUAL TUNING
CH
TV STATION TABLE
Manual Setup
TV System
VCR Output CH
Auto Setup
: Off
: On
: English
buttons, until the Manual
Press the or buttons until the NAME is selected.

The station name is set automatically from the broadcast signal.
To change the programmes name, press the button.

The first letter of the name flashes.
Result:
10
On completion, press the RETURN button three times to exit the

menu.
Press the or buttons until the CH

is selected.
Press the or buttons to go on
scanning the frequency band and display
the next station
Go back to the beginning of Step 9
Press the or buttons until the MFT

is selected.
Press the or buttons to adjust the
picture, if necessary.
Press OK to store the station
14
Then...
Repeat this procedure from Step 9 onwards, until all the required
stations have been stored.
Do not wish to
store the station
displayed
Wish to store the

station displayed
If you...
Press the or buttons

respectively.
Move to the next or

previous character
13
12
Press the or button until the

required character is displayed
(letters, numbers or - character).
Select a character
in the name
Then...
Press the or buttons to start scanning channel.

Result:
The frequency band is scanned and the first station
found is displayed.
To...
Press the button to preset the station.

Result:
The MANUAL TUNING menu is displayed.
11
Press the or buttons to select a programme number as

required.
Press the OK or to select a Manual Setup option.

Result:
The TV STATION TABLE menu is displayed.
or
Setup option is selected.

Result:
buttons to select the Install

option.

Result:
You do not need to preset the stations manually if you

have already set them automatically.
Presetting the Stations Manually
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
DELETE : CLEAR
PR
VCR
On completion, press the RETURN button four times to exit the

menu.
Repeat the same procedure from Step 6 onwards until all the
required stations have been cleared.
Press the CLEAR button.
Press the corresponding or buttons, until the required

preset TV station (PR) is selected.
or

Result:

Result:

option.

Result:
you can cancel it.
At the wrong programme position
That you do not require
If you have stored a TV station:
Clearing a Preset Station
021
CH
SWAPPING : OK
RETURN
21
Install
NAME
:G
: CH 36
: Off
: On
: English
TV STATION TABLE
DELETE : CLEAR
PR
Manual Setup
TV System
VCR Output CH
Auto Setup
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
VCR
GB
4-9
GB
4-10
22
DELETE : CLEAR
----
:G
: CH 36
Install
SWAPPING : OK
RETURN
----
SWAPPING : OK
RETURN
TV STATION TABLE
DELETE : CLEAR
TV STATION TABLE
Manual Setup
TV System
VCR Output CH
: Off
: On
: English
Press the OK or button to select this option.

Result:

preset TV programme is selected.
Result:
The selected station is displayed at the same time on
the television screen.
To change the programme number assigned to a station press

the OK button on the remote control. (For example, To move a
TV station in programme 1 to programme 3)
Press the or buttons to select required position.

And then press OK again to swap the position.

menu.
or buttons, until the Manual
Press the OK or buttons to select this option.

Result:

option.

Result:
You can rearrange the Station Table and give different

programme numbers to the stations listed according to your own
preferences.
Changing the Preset Station Table
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Auto Setup
VCR
Press the OK or buttons to select G or K.
. . CH36
. . CH69

Then tune your television again (see page 14).
CH21
Select the required output channel (CH21~CH69) by pressing

the OK or buttons.

Result:
Press the or buttons, until the VCR Output CH option

is selected.

option.

Result:
Your DVD-VCR output channel may need to be changed if the

pictures suffer from interference or if your TV cannot find the
pictures.
Also, you can change the DVD-VCR output channel to adjust the
frequency in which information is displayed on the screen.
Setting the DVD-VCR Output Channel
Press the
selected.
4
or buttons, until the TV System option is

Result:

option.

Result:
You can choose the sound mode (B/G or D/K) according to the
TV set connected to your VCR.
Selecting the RF OUT Sound Mode (B/G-D/K)
Manual Setup
TV System
VCR Output CH
Auto Setup
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Manual Setup
TV System
VCR Output CH
Auto Setup
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Install
:G
: CH 36
: Off
: On
: English
23
Install
VCR
:G
: CH 36
: Off
: On
: English
VCR
CH 21
:
CH 36
:
CH 69
GB
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
GB
24
: Auto
: On
: On
: Off
NICAM
IPC
ShowView Extend
: Off
: On
: English
Colour System
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
User Set
User Set
NICAM
: On
: On
: Off
NICAM
IPC
ShowView Extend
VCR
: Auto
Colour System
: Off
: On
: English
On
Off
Auto
PAL
B/W
Black and White
On completion, press RETURN three time to exit the menu.
B/W
Press the OK or button to select AutoPALB/W.

Auto When playing back a cassette, the system standard is
automatically selected by the DVD-VCR.
buttons, until the Colour
On: Normally set at this position.
On is displayed.
NICAM mode
Off: Only set at this position to record

the standard mono sound during a
NICAM broadcast if the stereo sound is
distorted due to inferior reception
conditions.
Press OK or , until...
Off is displayed.
buttons, until the NICAM
Mono mode
To...
or

options selected.
Press the corresponding , buttons to select the

User Set option.
Result:
The User Set menu is displayed.

Result:
NICAM programmes are divided into 3 types. NICAM Stereo,

NICAM Mono and Bilingual (transmission in another language).
NICAM programmes are always accompanied by a standard
mono sound broadcast and you can select the desired sound.
Please refer to page 37.
System option is selected.
4
or

Result:

User Set option.
When playing back a cassette, the standard is

automatically selected by the DVD-VCR.
When you playback an NTSC-recorded tape on this DVDVCR make a setting on the colour system according to
your TV. If your TV is a PAL system only TV, set NTPB.
If your TV is Multi System TV (NTSC 4.43 compatible), set
NT4.43 and you can record NT4.43.

Result:
Before recording or playing back a cassette, you can select the

required system standard.
Otherwise, the system automatically selects the reception
standard when you select AUTO.
Selecting the Colour Mode
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
VCR

Result:
Press the corresponding or buttons, until the IPC option is
selected.
4
5
When intelligent picture control mode is On , the

sharpness of the image is adjusted automatically.
If you do not press a button within ten seconds, the

PICTURE menu disappears automatically.
You can also directly Select function suing IPC button

on the remote control.
On completion, press the RETURN button.
Press the or buttons until the picture is displayed according

to your preferences.
To adjust the sharpness manually, press the OK or button to

turn the IPC mode Off.
Press the OK or button to select IPC (Intelligent Picture

Control) option.

User Set option.
Press the OK or .
Result:
During playback, press the MENU button on the remote control.
The Intelligent Picture Control Feature allows you to adjust the

sharpness of the image automatically, according to your own
preferences.
Intelligent Picture Control
: Auto
: On
: On
: Off
NICAM
IPC
ShowView Extend
: Off
: On
: English
Colour System
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
25
User Set
VCR
On
Off
GB
4-11
4-12
GB
26
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
: Off
: On
: English
Language
Install
: Off
: On
: English
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
User Set
Off
10
20
30
40
50
60
Off
1Hour
2Hour
3Hour
To turn off, press OK or buttons repeatedly until Off shows.
1Hour
2Hour
3Hour
Off
Press the OK or buttons, until you select the time of Auto

Power Off interval.
buttons, until the Auto
Press the corresponding or

Power Off option is selected.

Result:
The Auto Power Off feature automatically turns off your DVDVCR if no signal is received and you do not press any button for
the selected time.
Press the OK or buttons to set the ShowView Extend time

by increments of 10 minutes.

Result:
Press the corresponding or buttons, until the

ShowView Extend option is selected.
Press the corresponding , buttons to select the User Set

option.
Only use if PDC is not available or set to Off.
To prevent delays or over-runs, the VCR has a function called

ShowView Extend allowing you to extend the recording time by
up to 60 minutes.
Auto Power Off
: On
: On
: Off
NICAM
IPC
ShowView Extend
VCR
: Auto
Colour System
: Off
: On
: English
ShowView Extend
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
VCR
Off is displayed.
Hide on-screen information
On is displayed.
or
buttons, until the Tape
E240
E260
Press RETURN twice to exit the menu.
E180
E 300
Press the OK or buttons as many times as required, until the

correct cassette length is displayed.
Select option is selected.

Result:
The VCR Setup menu is displayed.
After pressing the MENU press the corresponding

buttons to select the VCR option.
If you wish to use the tape counter to display the time remaining
on a cassette, you must indicate the type of cassette inserted.
Selecting the Cassette Type
Display on-screen information
To...
Press the corresponding or buttons, until the Screen

Messages option is selected.
2
3

Result:
Your DVD-VCR displays most information on both the DVD-VCR

and the television.
You can choose to display or hide this information on the
television screen (except for the SEARCH, Programming MENU
and Timer functions, which cannot be hidden).
Screen Messages
: E180
: Off
: Off
Repeat Play
S-VHS
: Off
: On
: English
27
VCR Setup
VCR
: Off
: On
: English
Tape Select
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
VCR
E180
E240
E260
E300
On
Off
GB
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
GB
28
: E180
: Off
: Off
Repeat Play
S-VHS
: Off
: On
: English
Tape Select
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
VCR Setup
VCR Setup
S-VHS Play
Repeat Play
S-VHS
VCR
: E180
: Off
: Off
Tape Select
: Off
: On
: English
Off
On
Off
On
Repeat Play
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
VCR
Off is displayed.
On is displayed.
Do not wish to repeat play
Repeat play
To...
or buttons, until the Repeat
Off is displayed.
Do not wish to S-VHS play

To watch S-VHS tapes, set the S-VHS mode to On in the VCR
Setup.
On is displayed.
S-VHS play
Press the corresponding or buttons, until the S-VHS

option is selected.
To...

Result:
Press the corresponding , buttons to select the VCR option.
During S-VHS play mode, press the MENU.
The DVD-VCR allows you to playback high quality S-VHS tapes.
Play option is selected.

Result:
After pressing the MENU, press the corresponding

You can set repeat play to repeat the tape continuously from
beginning to end.
In standard play mode

In long play mode
To record a cassette...
SP is displayed.
LP is displayed.
Press the SPEED button on the

remote control, until...
Each cassette lasts twice as long

The recording is of a slightly lower quality
LP (Long Play)
In Long Play modes:
SP (Standard Play)
You can record a cassette at two different speeds:
Selecting the Recording Speed
Type
E-300
E-260
E-240
E-180
300 mins. or 5 hours
29
260 mins. or
4 hours and 20 mins.
Recording Time (in SP)
VCR
GB
4-13
GB
4-14
30
VCR
VCR
To re-record over a protected cassette (safety tab broken),

cover the hole with adhesive tape.
If you wish to protect a cassette, break off the tab using a small
screwdriver.
Select:
The station to be recorded using the PROG ( or ) buttons

or
To stop recording, press once.
If your DVD-VCR ejects the cassette when you start

recording, check to make sure that the cassettes
safety tab is intact or that the opening (created by a
broken safety tab) is covered with adhesive tape.
If you reach the end of the tape while recording,
the cassette rewinds automatically.
Hold REC ( ) down for a while to start recording.

The record indicator appears on the television and
Result:
DVD-VCR display. An index is recorded on the tape
(see page 39).
Select the recording speed by pressing the SPEED button as

many times as required (see page 29).
The AV1, AV2 or AUX source using the INPUT SEL. button
for a satellite tuner or external video source
The station number is displayed and the programme
Result:
can be seen on the television.
Insert the cassette on which the programme is to be recorded,

with the window visible and the safety tab intact or the opening
covered with adhesive tape.
Result:
The DVD-VCR is switched on automatically.
To monitor the programme being recorded, select the television

channel reserved for use with your DVD-VCR (or the AV input if
used).
Before recording a programme, you must have preset the corresponding station (unless you are recording via an external video
source). If you have not done so, refer to pages 19 and 20.
Recording a Programme Immediately
Video cassettes have a safety tab to prevent accidental erasure.

When this tab has been removed, you cannot record on the tape.
Protecting a Recorded Cassette
Select:

or
This function is not available in DVD recording
If the end of the tape is reached while recording:

The recording stops and power off.
If you wish to cancel the recording before the end, press

STANDBY/ON.
Press the REC ( ) button several times to increase the

recording time in:
30-minute intervals up to four hours
1-hour intervals up to nine hours

The length is displayed on the television displays.
Result:
The selected programme is recorded for the length of
time requested. At the end of that time, the DVDVCR stops recording automatically and power off.
Hold the REC ( ) button down for a while to start recording.

The record indicator appears on the television screen
Result:
and DVD-VCR display. An index is recorded on the
tape (see page 39).

The AV1, AV2 or AUX source using the INPUT SEL. button
for a satellite tuner or external video source
The channel number is displayed and the
Result:
programme can be seen on the television.

Result:

used).
Your DVD-VCR stops automatically after the requested length of

time.
This function enables you to record up to nine hours (LP) of

programmes.
STANDBY/ON PHONES
Recording a Programme with Automatic Stop
COPY
PROG
LENGTH 2:30
S.MODE
P.SCAN
SELECT
SET LENGTH :
PRESS REC
REC
VOL
EJECT
31
VCR
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
32
PR
Start
Stop
SP
Off
V/P
: 0-9
:
ShowView
Timer Method
Speed
Code
Correct
cancel a preset recording.
If all six programmes have been set, the message Timer

is full is displayed. Refer to page 35 if you wish to
If you wish to correct the ShowView code that you are

entering:
Press the button until the digit to be corrected is
cleared
Enter the correct digit
When using the ShowView function for the first time with
stored stations, the programme number flashes. This one
time, you must enter the station number manually by
pressing the or buttons. Refer to the following page
if:
The programme number or times flash
You wish to modify the programme
ShowView is a trademark of Gemstar Development Corporation. The ShowView system

is manufactured under licence from Gemstar Development Corporation.
The numbers next to each TV programme listing are

ShowView code numbers, which allow you to
programme your videorecorder instantly with the
remote control. Tap in the ShowView code for the
programme you wish to record.
Refer to page 35 if you wish to:

Check that your DVD-VCR has been programmed correctly
Cancel a preset recording
Press the STANDBY/ON button to activate the timer.
If the programme and times are correct, press the RETURN

button.
Press the OK button.

The information concerning the programme is
Result:
displayed.
Press the numeric buttons to enter the code opposite the

programme that you wish to record in your television magazine.
To enter a ShowView, press the TIMER button.

Press the or and OK or buttons to select ShowView
Result:
A message is displayed to allow you to enter the
ShowView code.
Up to six programmes can be preset.
Insert the cassette on which the programme is to be

recorded (safety tab intact)
Check that the date and time are correct
Switch on both the television and your DVD-VCR
Before presetting your DVD-VCR:
Using the ShowView
WE 01 19 : 00 19 : 30
Day
Code
ShowView
Standard
VCR
VCR
Select the PDC recording
Select the recording speed
Extend the recording time
Record a programme every week

on the same day and at the same time
Record a programme every day

(Monday to Sunday) at the same time
Select an input source other

than the tuner (AV1, AV2 or AUX)
If you wish to...
The programme number is replaced by:
The input source must be selected before changing any other

value.
button for a satellite tuner or external video source
The AV1, AV2 or AUX source using the or
Do not select PDC unless you are sure the programme you
wish to record is broadcast with PDC. If you do set PDC On
(by selecting On in the right - hand column on the screen),
then you must set up the start-time EXACTLY according to
the published TV schedule. Otherwise the timer recording
wont take place.
Press the or buttons, until the PDC off flashes.

Press the or buttons until the On indication is displayed.
Auto (Auto Tape Speed Select) : see page 34

SP (Standard Play)
LP (Long Play)
33
Press the or buttons until the correct indication is displayed:
Press the or buttons, until the recording speed selection flashes.
Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the stop time.
Press the or buttons, until the Stop selection flashes.
displayed, followed by the required day.

Example: W-SA (Weekly Saturday)
Press the or buttons, until the W- (Week) value is
Press the or buttons, until the Day selection flashes.
displayed.
Press the or buttons, until the DLY (Daily) value is
Press the or buttons, until the Day selection flashes.
Result:
Press the or button to change the input source selection.
Press the or buttons, until the PR selection flashes.
Then...
If you wish to correct the programme displayed or modify certain elements, such as the recording speed,
you can do so before you press RETURN a second time to confirm.
Modifying ShowView Programming
GB
4-15
4-16
GB
34
PR
Start
Stop
17
SP
Speed
Off
V/P
Timer Method
Press to select the minutes.
Select the required minute value by pressing the

buttons.
Press to select the recording stop time.
Select the required recording stop time by pressing the or

buttons, following the same procedure as when selecting the
recording start time.
Press to select the recording speed.
Press the or buttons to select the SP (Standard Play), LP

(Long Play), Auto (Auto Tape Speed Select) recording speeds.
Press the or buttons to toggle between the V/P mode

(marked On) and the non V/P mode (marked Off).
When you have finished, press the RETURN button.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Auto Tape Speed Select. The DVD-VCRs Auto Tape

Speed Select function compares the duration of the
timer recording to the actual recording time remaining
on the tape loaded. If there is insufficient tape to
complete a timer recording in AUTO mode, the DVDVCR automatically switches to LP mode to record the
whole programme.

Before starting recording, the DVD-VCR compares
Result:
the timer duration with the remaining time on the
cassette.
Select the required hour value by pressing the or buttons.
8
or
Press to select the recording start time.
Select the required day by pressing the or buttons.
Press to select the recording day.
Select the required station or input source (AV1, AV2 or AUX )

by pressing the , buttons.
Press to select the input source.
Press the OK or button to select Standard option.

The TIMER PROGRAMMING menu is displayed.
Result:
Insert the cassette and press TIMER on the remote control.

The Timer Method is displayed.
Result:
Before presetting a recording, check that the date and

time are correct.
The Timer Programming feature allows you to preset the DVDVCR to record a programme up to one month before that
programme is to be broadcast. Up to six programmes can be
preset.
Using the Timer Programming Feature
WE 01 19 : 00 19 : 30
Day
ShowView
Standard
VCR
Press the or buttons to select the required programme.
On completion, press RETURN three times.
Select the programme to be cancelled by pressing the

buttons.
Press the CLEAR button to cancel the selected programme.

All the recording information is deleted and the
Result:
broadcast will not be recorded.
3
4
or
Press the OK or button to select Standard option.

Result:
Press TIMER on the remote control.

Result:
No longer required
Incorrect
You can cancel any programmes that are:
Cancelling a Preset Recording
Press the or buttons to select and change any values as

required. For more details, refer to the previous page.
Press the OK button to select Standard option.

Result:

Result:
If you have forgotten which programmes will be

recorded
When you have finished presetting the DVD-VCR
You can check your preset recordings:
Checking a Preset Recording
PR
PR
Date
Start
Stop
:
:
:
:
SP
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Speed
V/P
Off
35
Off
V/P
VCR
Stop
Start
SP
Speed
WE 01 19 : 00 19 : 30
Date
WE 01 19 : 00 19 : 30
VCR
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
SELECT
36
VCR
P.SCAN
VCR
EJECT
Eject the cassette
Result:
The tracking bar disappears when you release the button.
The image is adjusted.
The tracking bar appears.
When noise bars or streaks appear during playback, adjust alignment

manually by pressing the TRK ( or ) buttons until the picture is clear
and stable.
The Picture Adjustment feature allows you to adjust the

alignment manually to obtain the best possible picture.
(EJECT).
(STOP).
Then press...
When a cassette is loaded, the tape position is optimized

automatically to reduce disturbance (Digital Auto
Tracking).
When playing a cassette, if the end of the tape is reached,
the cassette rewind automatically.
NTSC tapes can be played back but cannot be recorded
with this DVD-VCR.
Stop the playback
To...
Insert the video cassette to be played. If the safety tab on the

cassette is intact, press ll.
Otherwise, the cassette is played automatically.
Switch on both the television and your DVD-VCR.
Adjusting Picture Alignment Manually
VOL
This function allows you to play back any pre-recorded cassette.
Playing a Cassette
When playing back tapes recorded in Hi-Fi, the

sound switches to Hi-Fi after five seconds of
Mono.
No sound is heard when playing back a cassette in

slow motion.
to start SLOW mode.

or button as many times as required to decrease or
Cassette
Video heads
When you have been using the Slow Motion function

for more than about two minutes, the DVD-VCR will
automatically play to protect the:
When playing back in slow motion, picture interference may

occur.
Press the TRK ( or ) buttons to minimize this effect.
increase the speed respectively

To return to the normal speed, press the ll button twice.
ll to start playing the cassette

ll button one more time to make still mode.
Press:
You can play a cassette in slow motion.
Playing a Cassette in Slow Motion
To select the sound mode, simply press the AUDIO button on the
remote control until the required option is displayed.
Used to listen to Hi-Fi stereo sound on the left and right

channels.
Used to listen to the sound on the normal mono

channel.
MONO
LR
Used to listen to the sound on the right Hi-Fi channel.

Used to listen to the mixed sound of the Hi-Fi and
normal channels.
MIX
Used to listen to the sound on the left Hi-Fi channel.
Description
Option
You can select the mode in which the sound is reproduced on the
loudspeakers and AV outputs. The following options are
available.
Selecting the Audio Output Mode
LR
37
VCR
MONO
MIX
VCR
GB
4-17
GB
4-18
38
VCR
SHUTTLE (<<) to play the cassette backwards

SHUTTLE (>>) to play the cassette forwards
ll during playback
REVERSE REVERSE REVERSE

PLAY
PLAY
PLAY
X9
X5
X3
STILL
SLOW
MOTION
X1/10
SLOW
MOTION
X1/5
PLAY
PLAY
X3
PLAY
X5
PLAY
X9
Each time you press a SHUTTLE button, the speed is changed

as shown in the following illustration.
Press:
No sound is heard when playing a sequence at variable

speeds.
Seq.
played
Seq.
2
etc.
This DVD-VCR uses a standard indexing system (VISS). As

a result, it will recognize any indexes marked by other
VCRs using the same system and vice versa.
Next
Seq. being
Prev
Press the OK or .
or
After pressing the SEARCH, press the corresponding

buttons, until the End Search option is selected.
Press the OK or .
1
2
or
Use this feature when you want to search for a blank position to record a
program on a cassette.
The VCR will fast forward, searching for a blank position, and then
automatically stop at that position.If the VCR reaches the end of the tape
during end search, the tape will be ejected.
End Search

buttons, until the Go To [0:00:00] option is selected.
Use this feature when you want to search for the [0:00:00] counter position
on a cassette. Press the CLEAR button at the point on the tape where you
want to set the counter to [0:00:00].
The VCR will rewind or fast forward, searching for the [0:00:00] counter
position, and then automatically stop at that position.
Go to [0:00:00] Stop
etc.
The Search function allows you to fast-forward or rewind to a

specific index and start playback from that point. Depending on the
direction selected, the indexes are numbered as follows:
Each time you record a cassette on this DVD-VCR, an index is

automatically marked on the tape when recording starts.
Searching for a Specific Sequence
The Shuttle function is available on the Remote control
You can vary the playback speed using the Shuttle function (up to
nine times the normal speed).
You wish to analyze a sportspersons technique,
Example:
movement by movement.
Playing a Sequence at Variable Speeds
39
VCR
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
40
INTRO SCAN :
- 06
Press the or buttons depending on the direction

where your desired programme is located.
When an Index mark is found the DVD-VCR will playback the

tape for 5 seconds, after which it will continue searching for the
next Index mark.
If you want to watch the tape from a particular Index, simply

press II twice.
To cancel an Index search simply press the II or button.
These Index searches can be made forwards: (press ) or

backwards: (press ). ( -20
0
+20
Press the or buttons twice more. This will take

you directly to the start of the desired programme is located.
Press the OK or .

buttons, until the Intro Scan option is selected.
1
or
This feature will enable you to fast forward/rewind to a specific

point on a tape: E.g. if you have recorded 3 different
programmes on a tape and you have rewound the tape to the
beginning, by using this feature you can go directly to the start of
programme 2 simply by pressing the SEARCH button.
Index Skip Search:
Press the OK or .
or

Intro Scan
INDEX SEARCH :
VCR
When you are ready,

Start playback or Recording.
Press the button.
To fast-froward or rewind to the sequence at which the
counter was set to zero, press or .
Press INFO.:
Once to display the current function, programme
number, recording speed, date, time and counter
Twice to display the counter only
Three times to display the time remaining on the
cassette
Four times to clear the display
Some DVD-VCR information, such as the counter, can

be displayed on the television screen (unless you have
deactivated the Screen messages mode; refer to page 27).
To set the tape counter to zero at the beginning of a sequence:

Press INFO. twice to display the counter
Press CLEAR when you want to set the tape counter to
zero
Insert a cassette in your DVD-VCR.
If the remaining time is to be calculated correctly, you

must indicate the type of cassette being used.
Allows you to find the beginning of a sequence easily
Indicates the elapsed time in the play and record

modes (hours, minutes and seconds)
Is reset when a cassette is inserted in the DVD-VCR
The tape counter:
Using the Tape Counter
41
0:00:00
VCR
GB
4-19
GB
4-20
42
RF
RF
VCR
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
DVD & VCR
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
DVD & VCR
IN
IN
VIDEO
AUX
OUT
OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
AUX
AUDIO
When you have finished recording, press on both VCR and

DVD-VCR.
Hold REC ( ) down for a while to start recording on your

DVD-VCR.
Plug the other end of the audio cable into the appropriate output
connectors on the other system (VCR, camcorder or Hi-Fi sound
system).
Take care to respect the colour coding of the left and right
channels.
If you wish to view the cassette being copied:

Your DVD-VCR must be connected as usual to the
television (see page 12 for further details)
Start playing back the cassette to be copied.
Connect one end of the RCA audio cable supplied into the
AUDIO INPUT sockets on the rear of the DVD-VCR.
Press the INPUT SEL. button to select the appropriate input on

your DVD-VCR:
AV1, AV2 for the SCART input
AUX for the RCA input
Insert the pre-recorded cassette in the other video source (VCR

or camcorder).
Insert a blank cassette in your DVD-VCR.
2
3
Connect the DVD-VCR, from which the cassette is to be copied,

to the appropriate SCART input connectors on the rear of your
DVD-VCR, as indicated on page 12.
It is an infringement of copyright laws to copy

prerecorded cassettes or to re-record them in any form
without the permission of the owners of the
corresponding copyright.
Plug the other end of the video cable into the appropriate output
connector on the other system (VCR or camcorder).
Connect one end of the RCA video cable into the VIDEO INPUT
socket on the rear of the DVD-VCR.
Make sure that both the television and the DVDVCR are switched off before connecting the cables.
You can copy a cassette to your DVD-VCR from another video

source, such as another VCR or a camcorder.
Recoding from Another VCR or Camcorder
Examples: You wish to copy a video cassette with the help of

a second VCR (see page 43).
You wish to play back and/or copy pictures taken
with a camcorder (see page 43).
You can connect other audio/video equipment to your DVD-VCR

using audio/video cables if the appropriate outputs are available
on the equipment chosen.
Connecting an RCA Audio/Video Input Cable
STANDBY/ON PHONES
REC
S.MODE
COPY
PROG
P.SCAN
SELECT
43
VOL
EJECT
VCR
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
44
RF
VCR
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
DVD & VCR
IN
VIDEO
AUX
A.DUB
-0:05:23
OUT
AUDIO
The audio dubbing will finish when the counter reaches 0:00:00.
10
The new sound will be recorded on the normal sound
track of the tape, and the original sound will remain on
the Hi-Fi sound track.
To hear the new sound and original sound mixed
together, press the Audio button on the remote control
until the MIX option is displayed (see page 37).
When you are ready:
Start playback on the sound system
Press the REC ( ) on the remote control.

The soundtrack is replaced on the pre-recorded
Result:
cassette.
On the sound system, locate the point on the cassette at which

you wish to start playback.
Example: The track that you wish to record on the cassette.
Press the ll button.

Press the ll button one more time to make Still mode.
Search back slightly beyond the Audio Dubbing start point using
the button.
Press A.DUB.
Result:
Your DVD-VCR is now in the Audio dubbing Still mode.
Search for the Audio Dubbing (ending) point using the , and
set the counter to 0:00:00 by pressing INFO. and CLEAR.
Insert the pre-recorded cassette on which the audio track is to

be replaced, and press the ll to start playback.
Connect the other end of the RCA audio cable to the audio input
connectors (L, R) on the rear of your DVD-VCR.
Connect an RCA audio cable to the appropriate output on your

sound system (cassette player for example).
Audio dubbing is applicable only to the longitudinal audio track

(normal audio).
Restriction:
A cassette player
A microphone connected to a sound system
A CD, DVD
With the Audio Dubbing function, you erase the previously

recorded sound and replace it with a new soundtrack from:
Audio Dubbing a Pre-recorded Cassette
Brand
PHILIPS
SABA
SONY
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
Codes
02, 20, 22
13, 14, 22 to 24
15, 16
13, 14, 24
07, 16 to 19, 21
When you change the batteries in the remote control,

you must reprogramme the code, following the same
procedure.
If several codes are indicated for your television brand,

try each one in turn until you find one that works.
If your television is compatible with the remote control,

it will switch off. It is now programmed to operate with
the remote control.
01 to 06
09, 23
09, 17, 21
02
08, 23 to 27
Function
Used to mute the volume of the television.

The various functions will not necessarily work on all
televisions. If you encounter problems, operate the
television directly.
Used to select the required programme.
PROG/TRK
( or )
TV MUTE
Used to adjust the volume of the television.
Used to select an external source.
INPUT SEL.
VOL + or
Used to switch between the TV and VCR modes.
TV or VCR
TV STANDBY/ON Used to switch the television on and off.
Button
You can then control the television using the following buttons.
Result:
SAMSUNG
AKAI
GRUNDIG
LOEWE
PANASONIC
Codes
Hold down the TV button and enter the two-figure code

corresponding to the brand of your television, by pressing the
appropriate numeric buttons.
Brand
Point the remote control towards the television.
Switch your television on.
To determine whether your television is compatible, follow the

instructions below.
Your DVD-VCR remote control will work with Samsung

televisions and compatible brands.
Using the TV Buttons on the Remote Control
45
VCR
GB
4-21
4-22
GB
Choosing a Connection
46
Component
Jack
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Television
or
Connection to an Television
Super Jack
S-VIDEO OUT
Television
The following show examples of connections commonly used to connect the DVD -VCR player with a TV
and other components. It is only available for DVD. The VCR out can not watch by this connection.
DVD
With the unit in Stop mode, press the MENU button.

Select DVD using , buttons, then OK or button
Select Language Setup using , buttons, then press the
OK or button.
Select Disc Menu using , buttons, then press the OK or
button.
Use the , buttons to select English.
Select Others if the language you want is not listed.
English is selected and the screen returns to Language Setup
menu.
1
2
3
4
5
6
This function changes the text language only on the disc

menu screens.
Using the Disc Menu Language
If you set the player menu, disc menu, audio and subtitle language
in advance, they will come up automatically every time you watch
a movie.
Setting Up the Language Features
Disc Menu
Disc Menu
Audio
Subtitle
Language Setup
: English
: English
: Automatic
47
Disc Menu Language
Setup
Setup
Setup :
Display Setup
DVD
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
48
Automatic
Subtitle Language
: English
: English
: Automatic
Language Setup
: English
: English
: Automatic
Language Setup
Select DVD using , buttons, then OK or button.

OK or button.
Select Audio using , buttons, then press the OK or button.
Press the , buttons to select English .

Select Original if you want the default soundtrack language
to be the original language the disc is recorded in.

menu.

OK or button.
Select Subtitle using , buttons, then press the OK or button.

Select Automatic if you want the subtitle language to be the
same as the language selected as the audio preference.
Some discs may not contain the language you
select as your initial language; in that case the disc will use its
original language setting.

menu.
Using the Subtitle Language
Using the Audio Language
Setup
Setup
Setup :
Display Setup
Subtitle
Disc Menu
Audio
Subtitle
Disc Menu
Audio
Subtitle
DVD
How to make the SETUP menu disappear or return to

menu screen during set up; Press RETURN or button.
Use the , buttons to select the desired item.

Then press the OK or button.
Dynamic Compression
- On : To select dynamic compression.
- Off : To select the standard range.
Center SPK Time Delay (See Page 67)
Surround SPK Time Delay (See Page 67)
Select Audio Setup using , buttons, then press the OK or

button.
2
3
Setting Up the Audio Options
Center SPK Time Delay

Surround SPK Time Delay
Setup
Setup
Setup :
Display Setup
: 0ms
: 0ms
49
DVD
GB
4-23
4-24
GB
50
Use Password
: No
Yes
Parental Setup
No
Yes
Enter your password. The Re-Enter Password

screen appears to confirm the password.
Enter your password again. The Parental Setup screen appears.
How to make the SETUP menu disappear or return to menu

screen during set up; Press RETURN or button.
If you have forgotten your password, see Forget Password in
the Troubleshooting Guide.(See page 75)
About the Change Password ;

- Use , to select Change Password.
Press OK. The Change Password screen appears.
- Enter your new password. Re-Enter the new password
again.
Use OK or to select Yes if you want to use a password.

The Enter Password screen appears.
Select Parental Setup using , buttons, then press the OK or

button.
About the Rating Level ;

The Rating Level will work only when Use Password is set
to Yes. To unlock the player, OK or to select No. Use
, to select Rating Level. Press OK.
- Use , to select the level(e.g. Level 6) and press OK.
Discs that contain Level 7 will now not play.
- To cancel the rating level, use OK or to select No in Use
Password.
The Parental Control function works in conjunction with DVDs

that have been assigned a rating - which helps you control the
types of DVDs that your family watches.
There are up to 8 rating levels on a disc.
Setting Up the Parental Control
Setup
Setup
Setup :
Display Setup
DVD
Select Display Setup using , buttons, then press the OK or

button.
Connect an S-Video cable from the S-Video Out on the back panel
of the DVD-VCR to the S-Video Input on your television.
Connect S-Video Out to TV
The S-Video is only for the DVD player. The tuner and VCR will
still be viewed through the RF or line inputs.
You must follow the DVD Out instructions above to activate
your alternative (S-Video) video selection.
If your television is equipped with S-Video input, you can enjoy
superior video quality when watching DVDs with your DVD-VCR.
S-Video Connections (for DVD)
- Sends COMPONENT INTERLACE signal from

COMPONENT JACK.
Depending on the type of television you have, you may want to adjust
the screen setting (aspect ratio).
1. 4:3 L-Box :
Select when you want to see the total 16:9 ratio screen DVD supplies,
even though you have a TV with a 4:3 ratio screen. Black bars will
appear at the top and bottom of the screen.
2. 4:3 Pan-Scan :
Select this for conventional size TVs when you want to see the central
portion of the 16:9 screen. (Extreme left and right side of movie
picture will be cut off.)
3. 16:9 Wide :
You can view the full 16:9 picture on your widescreen TV.
Black Level
Adjusts the brightness of the screen.(On/Off)
NTSC Disc Output
NTSC if the screen only has one NTSC-video entrance. If this is not
the case, you can choose to leave PAL 60Hz as is.
DVD Out
1. RGB: Sends RGB signal from the AV JACK(SCART terminal).
2. S-Video: Sends S-VIDEO signal from the S-VIDEO JACK.
3. Video: - Sends COMPOSITE VIDEO signal from the AV
JACK(SCART terminal).
TV Aspect
Use the , buttons to select the desired item. Then press the
OK or button.
Setting Up the Display Options
SURROUND L
FRONT L
SPEAKERS
CENTER
WOOFER
DVD
: PAL 60Hz
: RGB
SURROUND R
FRONT R
Display Setup
: 4:3 L-Box
51
To S-Video Input on Your TV
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DVD Only
TV Aspect
Black Level
NTSC Disc Output
DVD Out
Setup
Setup
Setup :
Display Setup
DVD
GB
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
GB
DVD Only
SURROUND R
SURROUND L
FRONT L
SPEAKERS
CENTER
WOOFER
52
Please set your TV to component

input. If your TV doesn't have
Progressive scan mode, there will
be no signal on the screen.
Press "OK" to confirm

Prorgessive scan mode.
Otherwise press "RETURN".
S-VIDEO OUT
FRONT R
To deactivate Progressive Scan, press the P.SCAN button again.

If the P.SCAN button on the front panel of the DVD-VCR is
pressed again, a blue LED will light up and Progressive Scan
mode will be canceled. Select another mode as your TV's AV input
to view another output of the DVD-VCR.
You can listen to audio sound through AUX audio output or 5.1CH
speakers while watching Component or S-Video output.
This is available only for a TV set that supports Progressive Scan.

While Progressive Scan is active, video, S-video, and SCART
output are not available.
To activate Progressive Scan, the DVD-VCR must be in Stop
mode.
Press the P.SCAN button on the front panel.

pressed, a blue LED will light up and the following message will be
displayed:
To activate Progressive Scan, press OK.
The following message will be displayed and then the picture will
be played in Progressive Scan mode.
Set your TV to COMPONENT.

Select component input as your TV's AV input. At this point, even
if the picture appears reddish, it is normal.
the picture will appear reddish or bluish.
If you mix up the connections when connecting the component cable,
Connect the component output of the DVD player to your TV set.

Use the component cable to connect the component output on the
back panel of the DVD-VCR to the component input of your TV.
What is Progressive Scan?

It is a set of jacks that can provide sharp and clear picture
quality by using twice the number of fields of lines than
component output.
Component video output is available only for DVD playback. RF

and Line input are available for Tuner and VCR playback.
If your TV set supports Progressive Scan, it can transmit Pr, Pb, and
Y signals separately, so you can enjoy sharp and clear picture.
Component Connections (for DVD)
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DVD
1
The picture will still and the audio will mute.
To resume playback, press the ll button.
If the player is left in Still mode for 5 minutes, it will stop
automatically.
Skip Forward will jump to the next chapter/track.

Skip Back will jump to the beginning of the current chapter/track.
Press Skip Back again to jump to the beginning of the previous
chapter/track.
Each press increases the slow motion speed playback to 1/8,

1/4 or 1/2 normal speed.
Audio is muted during slow motion playback
Slow function operates only in the forward direction
Slow function is not available for CD
Press the button once to stop playback. To resume the

DVD/CD from the point where the disc stopped, press the ll
button.
Press the button twice to completely stop playback. The next
time you press ll, the disc will start over from the beginning.
Stop/Resume
During playback, press the ll button to Still the image. Then use
the to play in slow motion at variable speeds.
Slow Motion
While a disc is in Play mode, press and hold the / buttons on

the remote control or front panel to visually search
forward/backward at 2X - 4X - 8X - 16X - 32X - 128X speed. Press
ll button to resume normal speed.
NOTE: CD search speed - 2X, 4X, 8X
Search Forward/Back
While a CD or DVD disc is in Play mode, press the l / l

buttons on the remote control or front panel to jump forward and
backward through disc chapters/tracks.
SKIP Forward/Back
Press the ll button on the remote control during playback.
Still
During DVD/CD playback you can select from the following

special playback options. To resume normal playback, press the ll
(PLAY/STILL) button.
Special Playback Features
53
DVD
GB
4-25
4-26
GB
If you are using a 16:9 TV
Vertical Fit
When a 4:3 DVD is viewed on a 16:9 TV, black bars will appear at the left and right of the screen in order to
prevent the picture from looking horizontally stretched.
Zoom Fit
The top, bottom, left and right of the screen are cut off and the central portion of the screen is enlarged.
Screen Fit
The top and bottom of the screen are cut off and the full screen appears. The picture will look vertically stretched.
Normal Wide
Displays the content of the DVD title in 16:9 aspect ratio. The picture will look horizontally stretched.
For 4:3 aspect ratio discs
Zoom Fit
Screen Fit
The top and bottom of the screen are cut off. When playing a 2.35:1 aspect ratio disc, the black bars at the top
and bottom of the screen will disappear. The picture will look vertically stretched. (Depending on the type of disc,
the black bars may not disappear completely.)
Wide Screen
Displays the content of the DVD title in 16:9 aspect ratio.
This function may behave differently depending on the type of disc.
Zoom Fit
Screen Fit
The top and bottom of the screen are cut off and the full screen appears. The picture would look vertically
stretched.
Normal Screen
Zoom Fit
55
DVD
Screen Fit
The top and bottom of the screen are cut off and the full screen appears. The picture will look vertically
stretched.
4:3 Pan Scan

The left and right of the screen are cut off and displays the central portion of the 16:9 screen.
4:3 Letter Box

The black bars will appear at the top and bottom of the screen.
initial setup (See page 51).
To ensure correct operation of the EZ VIEW button, you should set the correct aspect ratio in the
Adjusting the Aspect Ratio (EZ View)
The screen zoom mode operates differently depending on the screen setting in the initial DVD menu.
The screen size changes when the button is pressed repeatedly.
Press the EZ VIEW button.
54
To play back using aspect ratio (DVD)
DVD
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
56
0~9
ENG
ENG
MOVE
ENG
ENG
MOVE
ENG
ENG
DVD
OK
OK
OK
To make the screen disappear, press the INFO. button again.
Refers to the language of the film soundtrack. In the example,

the soundtrack is played in English 5.1CH. A DVD disc can
have up to eight different soundtracks.
Allows playback of the film from a desired time.

You must ok the starting time as a reference.
Most of DVD discs are recorded in chapters so that you can

quickly find a specific passage.
To access the desired title when there is more than one in the
disc. For example, if there is more than one movie on a DVD,
each movie will be identified.
Refers to the subtitle languages available in the disc.

SUBTITLE You will be able to choose the subtitles language or,
if you prefer, turn them off from the screen.
A DVD disc can have up to 32 different subtitles.
AUDIO
TIME
CHAPTER
TITLE
What is a Title?
A DVD may contain several different titles. For example, if a
disc contains four different movies, each might be considered a
title.
What is a Chapter?
Each Title on a DVD is usually divided into chapters (similar to
tracks on an audio CD).
Use the , buttons to make the desired setup.

You may use the number buttons of the remote control to
directly access a title, chapter or to start the playback from the
desired time.
During play, press the INFO. button on the remote.
When Playing a DVD
Using the Display Function (DVD/VCD/CD)
Use the , buttons to select the desired screen angle.

To turn off the display, press the ANGLE button again.
2
3
Use the , buttons to determine whether or not the subtitle

will be displayed.
How to have the same subtitle language come up

whenever you play a DVD; Refer to Setting Up the
Language Features on page 48.
This function depends on what languages are encoded

on the disc and may not work with all DVDs.
A DVD disc can contain up to 32 subtitle languages.
Initially, the subtitling will not appear on screen.

The subtitle languages are represented by abbreviations.
Use the , buttons to select the desired subtitle language.
Press the SUBTITLE button.
Using the SUBTITLE button
You can select a desired subtitle quickly and easily with the
SUBITILE button.
Selecting the Subtitle Language
When an ANGLE mark is shown, press the ANGLE button, then

an ANGLE select icon will appear at the upper left hand corner
of the screen.
Press the ANGLE button to see if an ANGLE

(
) mark is present at the upper left hand corner of the
screen.
When a DVD contains multiple angles of a particular scene, you

can select the Angle function.
Using the ANGLE button
Changing the Camera Angle
ENG
ENG
Off
On
57
DVD
DVD
GB
4-27
GB
4-28
Off
Of
58
DVD
Off
VCD/CD
DVD
DVD
To return to normal play, press REPEAT again, then press the

, buttons to select Off and press OK.
It is available to press CLEAR button on the remote controller in
order to stop REPEAT play.
Press OK.
Use the DISC MENU button in VCD 2.0 mode to select MENU ON
or OFF.
When in VCD 2.0 mode (MENU ON), this function does not work.
A-B REPEAT does not allow you to set point (B) until at least 5
seconds has elapsed after point (A) has been set.
Use the , or , button to select the part of the screen you

want to zoom in on.

During DVD play : press OK to zoom in 2X/4X/2X/Normal in
order.
During VCD play, press OK to zoom in 2X/normal in order.
During play or still mode, press the ZOOM button on the remote. A
square will be displayed on screen.
Select Title
track or disc.
DVD repeats play by chapter or title, VCD repeats play by
Press the OK button to repeat the title.
Repeat Title
Use the , buttons to select Title.

When you select Title Title will be highlighted.
Use the , buttons to select Stereo, or (On CD)
How to have the same audio language come up whenever you

play a DVD ; Refer to Setting Up the Language Features on
page 48.
A DVD disc can contain up to 8 audio languages.
This function depends on what audio languages are encoded on

the disc and may not work with all DVDs.
Use the , buttons to select the desired language on a DVD.

The audio languages are represented by abbreviations.
Press the AUDIO button.
Using the AUDIO button
You can select a desired audio language quickly and easily with the
AUDIO button.
Selecting the Audio Language
Press the OK button to repeat the current chapter.
When you select Chapter Chapter will be highlighted.
Repeat Chapter
Press OK at the point where you want the repeat play to stop (B).
To terminate the function, press the 'CLEAR' button.
Select Chapter
Use the , buttons to select Chapter.
Open Repeat Menu

Press the REPEAT button while in Play mode to open the Repeat
menu.
The current Repeat mode will be highlighted.
Press OK at the point where you want the repeat play to start (A).
The B is automatically highlighted.
Select Chapter, Title or A-B using the , buttons.
You can repeat a single chapter or a complete title.
Repeat Chapter/Title
Press the REPEAT button. Select A-B on screen with the ,

buttons.
Press the REPEAT button on the remote.

Repeat screen appears.
When playing a DVD
Repeat the current track, chapter, title, a chosen section (A-B), or

all of the disc.
Using the Zoom (DVD/VCD)
Track Disc A - B
Chapter Title A - B
Repeat Play
Off
Of
Track Disc A - B
Stereo
59
DVD
Chapter Title A - B
ENG DOLBY DIGITAL 5.1CH
VCD/CD
DVD
Off
VCD/CD
DVD
DVD
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
60
DVD
When you reach the scene you want to mark, press the OK
button. The icon will change to a number (1, 2, or 3).
Press the PLAY/STILL (ll ) buttons to skip to the marked

scene.
Use the , buttons to select the mark number you want to

delete.
Press the CLEAR button to delete a mark number.

Press the MARK button to turn off the display.
Depending on the disc, the mark function may not work.

When in VCD 2.0 mode (MENU ON), this function does not
work.
Up to three scenes may be marked at a time.
During play, press the MARK button on the remote.
Clearing a Mark
Use the , buttons to select a marked scene.
Recalling a Marked Scene
Use the , buttons to move to the desired Mark icon.
During play, press the MARK button on the remote. The Mark
icons will be displayed.
Using the Mark Function (DVD)
This feature lets you bookmark sections of a DVD or VCD so you

can quickly find them at a later time.
Using the Mark Function (DVD/VCD)
Use , buttons to select the folder, and then press the OK button.
A list of albums in the folder will appear.
- To view the next album, press the RETURN button.
Press the button to stop playback.

Playback of MP3-CD track will stop.
To change the album, press the button, and then press RETURN
button.
A list of albums in the MP3-CD will appear.
- To select another album and track, repeat Steps 2 and 3 above.
Depending the MP3 disc, it may take longer to start playing.

The following types of data CDs can be played: ISO 9660 level
1, level 3, or Joliet format CD-ROMs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs;
discs recorded with a compression/decompression data rate
greater than 128Kbps; and discs containing files with the "MP3"
or "mp3" extension.
Multisession CDs with a blank segment and MP3 CD-Rs
encoded in VBR (Variable Bit Rate) format cannot be played.
MP3 files names should be 8 characters or less in length. Korean
characters or special characters cannot be displayed.
Each time you press the REPEAT button in PLAY mode, the
selection will switch a follows: Off Track Folder RANDOM
Press the RETURN button to return to the initial MP3 menu.
Use , buttons to select ALBUM, and then press the OK button.

Select the track, and then press the OK button. Playback
will start.
- To select the previous track or next track, press or .
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to open the disc tray, and then
load the MP3 disc.
The MP3 menu screen will appear. Depending on the MP3 disc,
the appearance of the menu may be different.
Set the channel to "3" or use the TV/VIDEO button on the TV

to select the input source.
Press the DVD button on the remote control to switch to
DVD mode.
Before You Begin...
Data CDs (CD-ROMs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs) encoded in MP3 (MPEG1 Audio

Layer 3) format can be played.
MP3-CD Playback
MP3-CD Playback
ROOT
CLASSIC
JPG
METAL
POP
WMA
WMAMP3
00:00:08
ROOT
OK
MP3
WMA
WMA
MP3
WMA
MP3
WMA
REPEAT
SONG1
SONG2
SONG3
SONG4
SONG5
SONG6
SONG7
..
SONG4
Off
ROOT
CLASSIC
JPG
METAL
POP
WMA
WMAMP3
Off
61
DVD
GB
4-29
4-30
GB
WMA Play
62
Depending on the recording mode, some WMA CDs cannot be played.
Use , to select the song you want to play.

To play back Press ll button.
To change the directory Press button, and then
- Press RETURN button to move to the upper most directory and use , to select the desired folder.
To stop playback Press button.
To temporarily stop playback, Press ll button.
To resume playback, Press ll button.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to close the disc tray.

As the disc tray is closing, the screen will appear.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to open the disc tray, and then load the disc.
Load the disc with the labeled side up.
Set the channel to "3" or use the TV/VIDEO button on the TV to select the input source.
Press the DVD button on the remote control to switch to DVD mode.
Before You Begin...
WMA Disc Playback
DVD
DVD
This unit can play a maximum of 500 files and 300 folders per disc.
Important: The above recommendations cannot be taken as a guarantee that the DVD player will play MP3
recordings, or as an assurance of sound quality.
You should note that certain technologies and methods for MP3 file recording on CD-Rs prevent
optimal playback of these files on your DVD player (degraded sound quality and in some cases,
inability of the player to read the files).
63
Do not try recording copyright protected MP3 files.

Certain "secured" files are encrypted and code protected to prevent illegal copying. These files are of the following
types: Windows MediaTM (registered trade mark of Microsoft Inc) and SDMITM (registered trade mark of The SDMI
Foundation). You cannot copy such files.
Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 64Kbps when recording WMA files.
Sound quality with WMA files basically depends on the rate of compression/decompression you choose. Getting
CD audio sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion to WMA format, of at least 64Kbps
and up to 192Kbps.
Conversely, files with decompression rates below 64Kbps or over 192Kbps will not be played properly.
Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 128 Kbps when recording MP3 files.
Sound quality with MP3 files basically depends on the rate of compression/decompression you choose. Getting
CD audio sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion to MP3 format, of at least 128 Kbps
and up to 160 Kbps. However, choosing higher rates, like 192 Kbps or more, only rarely give better sound quality.
Conversely, files with decompression rates below 128 Kbps will not be played properly.
When naming your MP3 or WMA files do not exceed 8 characters, and place ".mp3, .wma" as the file
extension.
General name format of: Title.mp3. or Title.wma. When composing your title, make sure that you use 8 characters
or less, have no spaces in the name, and avoid the use of special characters including: (.,/,\,=,+).
Your MP3 or WMA files should be ISO 9660 or JOLIET format.

ISO 9660 format and Joliet MP3 or WMA files are compatible with Microsoft's DOS and Windows, and with
Apple's Mac. These two formats are the most widely used.
When you record MP3 files on the CD-R, please refer to the following.
CD-R MP3/WMA discs
MP3/WMA Play
GB
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
GB
64
01
05
09
13
02
06
10
14
03
07
11
15
Track
04
08
12
16
PROGRAM
------
RETURN
------
------
CLEAR
------
Program Order
RANDOM
To finish programming and start playback, press the ll button.

Tracks will play in the order they are added.
If the disc tray is opened during programming, Program Play will

be canceled.
Program Play can be set only when the CD is not playing.
To Cancel Program Play

- During playback or in Stop mode, press the CLEAR
button.
To Cancel Programming
- Press the REPEAT or RETURN button.
The program will not be saved and the program screen
will disappear.
Use , or , buttons to select the desired track (CD), and

then press the OK button.
The selected track will be added to the Program order.
- Press the CLEAR button. The track added last will be
deleted from the Program order.
Use , buttons to select PROGRAM, and then press the OK

button.
The Selective Play screen will appear.
- Select <RANDOM> and press the OK button to play
tracks in random order.
In STOP mode, press the REPEAT button.

The Playback Sequence menu will appear.
Set the channel to "3" or use the TV/VIDEO button on the

TV to select the input source.
DVD mode.
Before You Begin...
You can listen to songs randomly or in the desired sequence.

Up to 20 tracks can be programmed.
This function is available only with Audio CDs.
Program Play & Random Play
).
482
485
481
484
Album
Timer:
ROOT
CLASSIC
JPG
METAL
POP
WMA
WMAMP3
ROOT
JPG
JPG
JPG
JPG
JPG
JPG
RETURN
RETURN
486
483
Photo: 481/537
..
100K22
101K220
102K221
103K222
104K223
105K224
Off
ROOT
CLASSIC
JPG
METAL
POP
WMA
WMAMP3
Off
DVD
65
If no buttons on the remote control are pressed for 10 seconds, the menu will disappear. Press , or ,
buttons on the remote to display the menu again.
Slow : The pictures change automatically at about a 18-second

interval.
Normal : The pictures change automatically at about a 12second interval.
Slide Show : Starts the slide show.

Fast : The pictures change automatically at about a 6-second
interval.
Zoom : Each time the OK button is pressed, the image will

enlarge up to 4X. (Normal N 2X N 4X N 2X N Normal)
Rotate : Each time the OK button is pressed, the image

will rotate clockwise 90 degrees.
- To view the previous 6 pictures, press ().
In the thumbnail screen

- To view the next 6 pictures, press (
Album: Displays thumbnail images.
Use , buttons on the remote control to select the picture

you want to view, and then press the OK button.
The screen shown in the middle will appear. (Press ll to switch to
Slide Show mode.)

As the disc tray is closing, the screen shown on the left will
appear.
load the disc.

DVD mode.
Before You Begin...
Picture CD Playback
DVD
GB
4-31
GB
4-32
Picture CD Playback
66
Only files with the ".jpg" and ".JPG" extensions can be played.
If the disc is not closed, it will take longer to start playing and not all of the recorded files may be played.
Only CD-R discs with JPEG files in ISO 9660 or Joliet format can be played.
The name of the JPEG file may not be longer than 8 characters and should contain no blank spaces or special
characters (. / = +).
Only a consecutively written multisession disc can be played. If there is a blank segment in the multisession disc,
the disc can be played only up to the blank segment.
A maximum of 500 images can be stored on a single CD.
Kodak Picture CDs are recommended.
When playing a Kodak Picture CD, only the JPEG files in the pictures folder can be played.
Picture discs other than Kodak Picture CD may take longer to start playing or may not play at all.
If a number of files in 1 Disc are over 500, only 500 JPEG file can be played.
If a number of folders in 1 Disc are over 300, only JPEG files in 300 folders can be played.
CD-R JPEG Discs
DVD
Setting the Center Speaker
(B)=Df-Ds
Ideal Surround
Speaker Positions
Ideal Center Speaker

Position
Otherwise, change the setting according to the table.
Setting (ms)
0
1
2
3
4
5
Setting (ms)
0
3
6
9
12
15
Distance of (A) (m)

0.00
0.34
0.68
1.02
1.36
1.70
Distance of (B) (m)
0.00
1.02
2.04
3.06
4.08
5.10
If the distance of Df is equal to the distance of Ds in the figure, set the mode as 0ms.
Setting the Surround Speakers
(A)=Df-Dc
If the distance of Dc is equal to or longer than the distance of Df in the figure, set the mode as 0ms.
It is desirable to arrange all speakers

within this circle.
A delay effect can be added to the sound from the Center and Surround speakers to adjust the sound
according to the acoustic condition of the listening room. Initially, the delay time is set to 0 ms.
When 5.1CH Surround Sound is played, you can enjoy the best sound if the distance between you
and each speaker is the same. You can set the Delay Time in the Center/Surround Speakers to
customize the sound to the acoustic of your room.
Setting the Delay Time
67
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
68
RADIO ANT.
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
IN
VIDEO
AUX
OUT
AUDIO
SURROUND R
FRONT R
SURROUND L
FRONT L
SPEAKERS
CENTER
WOOFER
DVD Only
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
SURROUND R
FRONT R
SURROUND L
FRONT L
SPEAKERS
CENTER
WOOFER
Please do not set up the Subwoofer near by TV or monitor because the Subwoofer is not fully
magnetic shielded.
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical. Place it anywhere you like.
Subwoofer
It is better to place these speakers so that their tweeters are at your ear level, facing inwards (about 45)
toward you.
Front Speakers
It is better to place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly downwards, about 24 to 35
inches (60-90 cm) above your ear.
If your listening position is too close to the rear wall, place these speakers at the left and right of the listening
position so that they face each other.
Surround Speakers
Ideally, the center speaker should be positioned at the same height as the front speakers, but it may be placed
above or below your TV set.
Center Speaker
RF
DVD & VCR
Ideal Speaker Arrangement
About Speaker Setup
Press AMP VOL + and AMP VOL - buttons to adjust the speaker
volume.
The volume can be adjusted to a level between 10 and +10.
Use AMP VOL + and AMP VOL - buttons to adjust the bass or
treble of the speakers.
The bass or treble can be adjusted to a level between 10 and
+10.
Press the BASS or TREBLE button.

Each time you press the BASS or TREBLE button, the
corresponding setting will turn on or off.
To Set the Bass/Treble
While the subwoofer is being tested, a low bass sound of

100Hz or 125Hz will be heard.
While the test tone is being produced, you can use the VOL
buttons to set the speaker balance for the selected channel.
To end the speaker test, press the TEST button again.
In Stop mode, press the TEST button.

The test tone will be output to the speakers in the following
order: FL (Front Speaker/L) C (Center Speaker) FR (Front
Speaker/R) SR (Surround Speaker/R) SL (Surround
Speaker/L) SU (Subwoofer).
A hissing sound from a speaker indicates that the speaker is
installed correctly.
To Test the Speakers
Press the SPEAKER button.

Each time you press the button, the selection will change as
follows: FL C FR SR SL SU VOL.
To Set the Speaker Balance
About Speaker Setup
SL
SURROUND SPEAKER
LEFT
SUB WOOFER
SPEAKER
SUB
WOOFER
C
CENTER SPEAKER
FL
1,2
FRONT SPEAKER
LEFT
FR
69
SURROUND SPEAKER
RIGHT
SR
FRONT SPEAKER
RIGHT
GB
4-33
GB
4-34
70
STEREO [STEREO]
4 STEREO [4 STEREO]
MA [MATRIX]
MUSIC [MUSIC]
MOVIE [MOVIE]
STA [STADIUM]
CON [CONCERT]
JAZZ [JAZZ]
NATURAL [NATURAL]
Sound Mode Function
When you select a surround mode during playback of a

MP3, WMA or Audio CD, the 5.1-CH Surround Sound will
be selected.
During playback of a DVD encoded in 2 or more channels,

a surround mode cannot be selected.
Depending the type of disc being played, the effect of each

surround mode may vary.
Dolby Pro Logic II is new form of multi-channel audio signal

decoding technique that is improved from the existing Dolby
Pro Logic.
Dolby Pro Logic II separates Dolby Sound recordings as well as
regular stereo audio (video audio, TV broadcast, external input)
into 5.1 channels (front left and right, center, and surround left and
right) so you can enjoy regular audio signals with 6 speakers.
In addition, you can set different modes depending on the content
and format of audio and more accurately adjust the sound field.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Press the SOUND MODE button.

Each time you press the button, the mode will change as shown at
right.
4 STEREO/NATURAL/JAZZ/CONCERT/STADIUM These
effects are available in DSP mode.
- NATURAL : When listening to regular audio (TV/Radio)
- JAZZ : When listening to jazz or pop songs
- CONCERT : When listening to classical music
- STADIUM : When listening to live music or sports broadcast
- 4 STEREO : When listening to the sound field effect close to
the original sound
- STEREO : When listening to the original sound using the front
speakers and subwoofer
MATRIX./MOVIE/MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II) These effects
are available in Dolby Pro Logic II mode.
- MOVIE : Select this when watching a movie.
(You can experience the feeling of actually being at
the movies.)
- MUSIC : Select this when there are many musical elements.
(You can experience the feeling of actually being at a
live concert.)
- MATRIX : Select this if the source is regular audio.
(You can listen to mono tunes in 5.1-Ch Surround
mode.)
Sound Mode
Press l or l to tune in to a lower or higher frequency.
Automatic Tuning 3
Press and hold l or l to begin automatic tuning.
Automatic Tuning 2
Press PROG / button. A preset station will be selected on the

front panel display panel of the DVD-VCR.
Automatic Tuning 1
Tune in to the desired station.
Press the FM/AM button.

Each time you press the button, the selection will toggle between
FM and AM.
You can either automatically or manually tune in to an FM or AM

station.
Listening to the Radio
71
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
72
3.5
Presetting Stations
If the station you tuned in to is broadcasting in stereo,

"STEREO" will be displayed.
Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. You can store up to 20

FM and 10 AM stations by using the PROG / button.
Press the or OK button again to store 87-50 to FM 1.
Press the button or the OK button on the remote control. FM1

will blink on the display.
Select the reception mode and then select the preset station
number.
Use and to tune in to FM 87-50.
Press the FM/AM button to select "FM".

FM and AM.
You can store up to 30 stations (20 FM stations and 10 AM

stations).
Example: Storing an FM station of 87.50 MHz into the preset
station number 01
4-35
CHT-500 (RCA Jack)
4-36
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
Audio
Audio
+
Video
Audio
+
Video
8 Cm
12 Cm
8 Cm
12 Cm
8 Cm
12 Cm
Recording Disc Size

Types
20 min.
74 min.
20 min.
74 min.
Single-sided
240 min.
Double-sided
480 min.
Single-sided
80 min.
Double-sided
160 min.
Max.
Playing
Time
An LP is recorded as an analog
signal with more distortion. CD
is recorded as a Digital Signal
with better audio quality, less
distortion and less deterioration
of audio quality over time.
Video with CD sound, VHS

quality & MPEG-1 compression
technology.
DVD contains excellent sound

and video due to Dolby Digital
and MPEG-2 system.
Various screen and audio
functions can be easily selected
through the on-screen menu.
Characteristics
PAL colour
system in U.K,
France,
Germany, etc.
PAL
STEREO
Stereo
NTSC broadcast Dolby
Digital disc disc
system in USA,
Canada, japan,
South Korea, etc.
NTSC
DTS disc
Digital
Audio disc
DIGITAL
SOUND
Both the DVD player and the discs are coded by region. These regional codes must match in order for the
disc to play. If the codes do not match, the disc will not play.
The Region Number for this player is described on the rear panel of the player.
Playback Region Number
Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Playback
Region Number
Disc Markings
* DO NOT play CD-ROM, CD-I and DVD-ROM in this player!

(CDGs play audio only, not graphics.)
* It may not be to play CD-R,CD-RW and DVD-R in all cases due to the type of disc or condition of the
recording.
AUDIO-CD
VIDEO-CD
DVD
Disc Types
(Logos)
This DVD player is capable of playing the following types of discs with the corresponding logos :
Disc Type and Characteristics
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S.MODE
COPY
DVD DECK
DVD OPEN/CLOSE
VCR DECK
VCR EJECT
STANDBY/ON
HEADPHONE JACK
STOP
REW/SKIP BACK BUTTON
PLAY/STILL
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
REC
1
2
3
4
5
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
DVD & VCR

LINE
IN
LINE
OUT
2 3 4
AUDIO
VIDEO
RF ANTENNA INPUT
RADIO FM ANTENNA INPUT
LINE IN
LINE OUT
COOLING FAN
RF
Rear View of the DVD-VCR
STANDBY/ON PHONES
Front View of the DVD-VCR
14
6
7
8
9
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
P.SCAN
17
SELECT
10
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DVD Only
SURROUND R
FRONT R
SURROUND L
FRONT L
SPEAKERS
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

5.1CH SPEAKER OUT
RF OUT TO TV
RADIO AM ANTENNA INPUT
S-VIDEO OUT
F.F/SKIP NEXT BUTTON

RECORD
SOUND MODE
COPY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
PROGRAMME /
PROGRESSIVE SCAN
SELECT DIAL
VOLUME DIAL
15 16
PROG
CENTER
WOOFER
18
VOL
EJECT
GB
4-37
GB
4-38
22
23
24
4
5
14
15
16
17
18
19
13
12
11
7
8
9
10
42
37
38
39
40
41
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
25
21
20
Infrared Remote Control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
STANDBY/ON
SHUTTLE<< / >>
ANGLE/IPC
DVD SELECT
VCR SELECT
TV VOLUME
OPEN/CLOSE, EJECT
EZ VIEW
REWIND, SKIP BACK
STOP
DISC MENU
MENU
LEFT
RECORD
TEST
SPEAKER
TV/VCR
MODE, REPEAT
TITLE, SPEED
TV STANDBY/ON
0-9
ZOOM, INPUT SELECT
TV SELECT
FM/AM SELECT
AMP VOLUME
PROG/TRK ( , )
AUDIO
MUTE
FAST-FORWARD, SKIP NEXT
PLAY/STILL
CLEAR
RETURN, A.DUB
UP
OK
RIGHT
DOWN
INFO.
BASS
SOUND MODE
TREBLE
MARK, SEARCH
SUBTITLE, TIMER
BATTERIES
REMOTE CONTROL
8 The Hi-Fi track of a VHS videotape is playing or

the current TV program or video is broadcast in
Stereo.
9 Timer Recording is in progress. When it blinks
an error has occurred. When recording is on, it
displays without the clock hands. It also blinks
when you pause the VCR.
10 COPY mode indicator
AM ANTENNA CABLE
COAXIAL CABLE
FM ANTENNA CABLE
AUDIO & VIDEO CABLE OWNERS INSTRUCTIONS
You have just purchased a SAMSUNG Video Cassette Recorder (DVD-VCR).

Together with your DVD-VCR, you will find the following accessories in the box.
Accessories
1 The DVD Deck is active.

2 DVD or CD media is loaded.
3 The time, counter position, time remaining or current
deck status is indicated.
4 Recording is in progress (normal and timer).
5 VHS videotape is loaded.
6 The VCR Deck is active.
7 A DVD with a DTS soundtrack is loaded.
Display Indicators
10
GB
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
GB
LINE
OUT
Rear
AUDIO
10
75
coaxial
In
In
Out
Out
Out
Out
AM Antenna
FM Antenna
Aerial
Cable television network
Satellite receiver
Television
S-Video out (DVD only)
COMPONENT out (DVD only)
Audio out (DVD only)
Television
Other VCR
Refer to the documentation supplied with your equipment for detailed connection instructions and
associated safety precautions.
TV
socket on your
on
To obtain better quality pictures and sound on your television,

you can also connect your DVD-VCR to the television via the
RCA cable (see section below) if your television is equipped
with this type of connection.
Plug the other end of the coaxial cable into the connector
previously used for the aerial on the television.
Plug the coaxial cable supplied into the

DVD-VCR.
Connect this cable to the 75 coaxial socket marked

the rear of your DVD-VCR.
Remove the aerial or network input cable from the television.
Make sure that both the television and the DVD-VCR

are switched off before connecting the cables.
An outdoor aerial
An indoor aerial
A cable television network
A satellite receiver
TV
RF
DVD & VCR
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
LINE
IN
LINE
OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
RF
RF
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
DVD & VCR
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
LINE
IN
LINE
IN
DVD & VCR
RADIO ANT.
LINE
OUT
LINE
OUT
Connect one end of the RCA Audio/Video cable to the Video output and Audio L, R output socket on the rear
of the DVD-VCR.
Plug the other end into the appropriate connector on the television.
11
Connect the coaxial cable as indicated in the above section.
Regardless of the type of connection chosen, you must always connect the coaxial cable supplied.
Otherwise, no picture will be visible on the screen when the DVD-VCR is switched off.
Make sure that both the television and the DVD-VCR are switched off before connecting the cables.
You can connect your DVD-VCR to the television using the RCA cable if the appropriate input is available
on the television. You thus:
Obtain better quality sound and pictures
Simplify the setting up procedure of your DVD-VCR
RF coaxial cable
TV
Aerial
Connecting DVD-VCR to the TV using the RCA Cable
To receive television programmes a signal must be received from

one of the following sources:
Connecting DVD-VCR to the TV using the Coaxial Cable
Recommended Use
Whenever you connect an audio or video system to your DVD-VCR, ensure that all elements are
switched off.
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
FM/AM Antenna Rear

Input
coaxial
75
S-JACK
RCA
Audio RCA
75
coaxial
Rear
S-VIDEO OUT
Rear
Direction
Audio/Video RCA In/Out
Type
IN FROM ANT. Rear
OUT TO TV
S-VIDEO
output
S-VIDEO OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT Rear
output
Audio output
LINE
OUT
Rear
LINE 1
LINE
IN
Location
Connector
Your DVD-VCR is equipped with the following connectors.
Systems connected permanently to the DVD-VCR (satellite receiver for example) or temporarily
(camcorder for example)
Types of connectors available on your systems
You must take into account various factors when connecting audio or video systems:
Deciding How to Connect DVD-VCR
GB
4-39
4-40
GB
12
LINE
IN
LINE
OUT
AUDIO
VIDEO
Sound system
VCR
Camcorder
The RCA input/output connectors on the rear of the DVD-VCR are used for equipment,
such as camcorders, VCRs or sound systems.
REAR OF THE DVD-VCR
You can connect other audio and/or video equipment to your DVD-VCR in different ways. The following
illustrations give a few examples of the connection possibilities.
Connecting DVD-VCR to a Satellite Receiver or Other Equipment
Select the required language by pressing the or buttons.

Press OK to store the language selected.
Result:
A message appears.
3
4
Auto preset can be performed by pressing (STOP) on

the VCR continuously for 5 seconds or more with no
tape inserted.

The number of stations automatically stored by the VCR
depends on the number of stations that it has found.
Press OK button.
Plug the DVD-VCR into the mains.

Result:
The Language Set menu is displayed.
Connect the coaxial cable as indicated on page 11.

(Connecting Your DVD-VCR to the TV Using the Coaxial Cable)
Your DVD-VCR will automatically set itself up when it is plugged

into the mains for the first time. TV stations will be stored in
memory. The process takes a few minutes. Your DVD-VCR will
then be ready for use.
Plug & Auto Set up
RF
Date
1/JAN
12 : 00
Please wait
Time
TV
DVD & VCR
LINE
OUT
00 %
2004 THU
13
Auto setup
LINE
IN
Clock Set
Year
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
14
Switch on the DVD-VCR by pressing STANDBY/ON on the front

of the DVD-VCR or STANDBY/ON on the remote control.
Select a programme position on the television to be reserved for

use with your DVD-VCR.
Insert the video cassette in the DVD-VCR. Check that the

DVD-VCR starts reading the cassette; if not, press II button.
Start a scan on your television or set the television to UHF

channel 36.
Fine tune the television until the pictures and sound are obtained
clearly.
If you cannot find the pictures and sound, or there is interference

from nearby channels, it may be necessary to change the setting
of the DVD-VCR output channel (see Setting the DVD-VCR
Output Channel on page 23 and Problems and Solutions on
page 65).
When the picture and sound are perfectly clear, store this
channel at the desired programme position on the television.
Result:
That programme is now reserved for use with your
DVD-VCR.
To view pictures from your DVD-VCR when a RCA

cable is used, the television must be set to the
audio/video mode (AV).
You must tune your television for the DVD-VCR only if you are
not using a RCA cable
Tuning Your Television for the DVD-VCR
INPUT SEL. BUTTON

Press the INPUT SEL. button repeatedly to cycle through all of
your input sources, including the Tuner (PR##), Line 1 (rear AV
input), and Line 2 (front AV input).
Input select is only available when the VCR deck is selected.
Before using the DVD operation of 44~64 pages, press

the DVD button on the remote control to select and
watch DVD.
Before using the VCR operation of 19~43 pages, press

the VCR button on the remote control to select VCR
mode.
VCR Button
Press the VCR button on remote control when you want to
control the VCR deck.
The VCR indicator will light on the Front Panel Display to
show that VHS deck is selected.
DVD Button
Press the DVD button on the remote control when you want to
control the DVD deck.
The DVD indicator will light on the Front Panel Display to
show that the DVD deck is selected.
STANDBY/ON Button
Press the STANDBY/ON button on the remote control or front
panel to turn on the DVD-VCR.
The DVD-VCR uses one set of controls to operate both decks.

The following keys are helpful in successfully controlling each
deck.
Deck Control Keys
STANDBY/ON PHONES
15
GB
4-41
4-42
GB
PROG
Button
Press to change to the next or previous channel.
0-9 Buttons
Press to select channels directly.
INFO.
Press to display the channel you are watching.
Also works in DVD and VCR mode.
TV/VCR Button
Press to switch between your TVs tuner and the VCRs internal
tuner.
The following buttons are used when watching television via the
DVD-VCRs built-in TV tuner.
16
Do not mix different battery types (manganese and

alkaline for example).
Replace the cover by aligning it with the base of the remote

control and pushing it back into place.
Insert two AAA, RO3 or equivalent batteries, taking care to

respect the polarities:
+ on the battery with + on the remote control
on the battery with on the remote control
Push the tab in the direction of the arrow to release the battery
compartment cover on the rear of the remote control.
Find that the remote control is no longer working

correctly
Purchase the DVD-VCR
You must insert or replace the batteries in the remote control

when you:
Inserting Batteries in the Remote Control
Basic TV Tuner Operations
Copy the DVD to VHS Tape

Press the COPY button on the DVD-VCR front panel.
The DVD will go into Play mode and the VCR will go into
Record mode.
If the DVD disc menu appears, you may need to press the
PLAY button manually to begin copying.
Stop the Copy Process
When the DVD is finished playing, press the VCR button on the
remote control and then press the STOP button to end the copy.
You must stop the Copy process manually when the DVD
movie ends or the DVD may replay and record over and over
again.
The copy is only active PAL Disc system.
Insert VHS Tape

Insert a blank VHS videotape into the VCR deck.
INSERT DISC
Insert the disc you wish to copy in the DVD deck and close the
drawer.
If the DVD you are attempting to copy is copy

protected, you will not be able to copy the disc. It is not
permitted to copy Macrovision encoded DVDs.
The DVD-VCR allows you to copy the contents of a DVD to a

VHS tape with a press of the COPY button.
Copying from DVD to VCR
ON PHONES
STANDBY/ON PHONES
STANDBY/ON PHONES
REC
REC
S.MODE
S.MODE
COPY
COPY
REC
S.MODE
COPY
PROG
PROG
P.SCAN
P.SCAN
SELECT
SELECT
EJECT
17
VOL
EJECT
VOL
GB
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
GB
Clock Set
Date
Year
1 / JAN / 2004 THU
: Off
: On
: English
Press the or buttons to increase or decrease the value.

Result:
The day of the week is displayed automatically.
18
English
Franais
Deutsch
Espaol
Italiano
Nederlands
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Language Set
: Off
: On
: English
Place the selection arrow next to your desired Language, then

press the OK button.
Set menu Language
Use the or buttons to highlight

Language, then press the OK or .
Select Language
Open MENU
Press the or to select On/Off, if you select Auto Clock.

Result:
The selected On/Off is displayed.
You can hold the or buttons down to scroll more

quickly through the values.
Press or to select the hour, minutes, day, month and year.

Result:
The option selected highlight.

Result:
The Clock Set menu is displayed.
buttons to select the Clock

option.
2
,

Result:
Do not forget to reset the time when you change

clocks from winter to summer time and vice versa.
You must set the date and time when:

You purchase the DVD-VCR
Setting the Menu Language
Time
12 : 00
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Your DVD-VCR contains a 24-hour clock and calendar used to:

Automatically stop programme recording
Preset your DVD-VCR to record a programme
automatically
Setting the Date and Time
You do not need to preset the stations if you have already

set them automatically (see Plug & Auto Set Up on page 13).

option.
Result:
Press the corresponding or buttons, until the Auto
2
3
4
Once the auto scanning procedure has finished,

some stations may have been stored more than
once; select the stations with the best reception and
delete the ones no longer required (see page 21).
If you wish to cancel the auto scanning before the end, press the
MENU button to exit the menu.
The number of stations automatically stored by the DVDVCR depends on the number of stations that it has found.

Result: The Please Wait indication highlight on the
television screen.
The first frequency band is scanned and the first
station found is displayed and stored.
The DVD-VCR then searches for the second
station and so on.
When the automatic scanning procedure has
finished, the DVD-VCR switches automatically to
programme 1.
Press OK button.
Result: A message appears, indicating that any channels
already preset on your VCR will be deleted.
And then press the OK or to select this option.

Result: The country selection is displayed.
Setup is selected.

Result:
You can store up to 80 stations.
You must preset the stations received through the tuner. This can
be done:
Plug & Auto Set up (see page 13)
Automatically
Manually (see page 20)
Your DVD-VCR contains a built-in tuner used to receive television

broadcasts.
Presetting the Stations Automatically
Please Wait
Your data will be lost

Press OK to continue
Menu to exit
Manual Setup
TV System
VCR Output CH
Auto Setup
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Install
15%
19
Auto Setup
Auto Setup
:G
: CH 36
: Off
: On
: English
VCR
GB
4-43
GB
4-44
: --
: -
: ----
CH
MFT
NAME
MEMORY : OK
RETURN
PR
20
NAME
:G
: CH 36
Install
SWAPPING : OK
RETURN
MANUAL TUNING
CH
TV STATION TABLE
Manual Setup
TV System
VCR Output CH
Auto Setup
: Off
: On
: English
Press the or buttons until the NAME is selected.

The station name is set automatically from the broadcast signal.
To change the programmes name, press the button.

The first letter of the name flashes.
Result:
To...
10
11
On completion, press the RETURN button three times to exit

the menu.
Press the or buttons until the CH

store the station is selected.
Press the or buttons to go on
scanning the frequency band and
the next station
Go back to the beginning of Step 9
Press the or buttons until the

MFT is selected.
Press the or buttons to adjust the
picture, if necessary.
Press OK to store the station
14
Then...
Press the or buttons

respectively.
Repeat this procedure from Step 9 onwards, until all the

required stations have been stored.
display
displayed
Do not wish to
Wish to store the

station displayed
If you...
Move to the next or

previous character
Press the or button until the

required character is displayed
(letters, numbers or - character).
13
12
Press the or buttons to start scanning channel.

Result:
The frequency band is scanned and the first station
found is displayed.
Select a character
in the name
Press the button to preset the station.

Result:
The MANUAL TUNING menu is displayed.
Then...
Press the or buttons to select a programme number as

required.

Result:
or

Result:

option.

Result:
You do not need to preset the stations manually if you

have already set them automatically.
Presetting the Stations Manually
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
DELETE : CLEAR
PR
VCR

menu.
Repeat the same procedure from Step 6 onwards until all the
required stations have been cleared.
Press the CLEAR button.

preset TV station (PR) is selected.
or

Result:

Result:

option.

Result:
you can cancel it.
At the wrong programme position
That you do not require
If you have stored a TV station:
Clearing a Preset Station
021
CH
SWAPPING : OK
RETURN
21
Install
NAME
:G
: CH 36
: Off
: On
: English
TV STATION TABLE
DELETE : CLEAR
PR
Manual Setup
TV System
VCR Output CH
Auto Setup
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
VCR
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
22
----
SWAPPING : OK
RETURN
TV STATION TABLE
DELETE : CLEAR
----
:G
: CH 36
Install
SWAPPING : OK
RETURN
TV STATION TABLE
Manual Setup
TV System
VCR Output CH
Auto Setup
: Off
: On
: English
To change the programme number assigned to a station press

the OK button on the remote control. (For example, To move a
TV station in programme 1 to programme 3)
Press the or buttons to select required position.

And then press OK again to swap the position.

menu.

preset TV programme is selected.
Result:
The selected station is displayed at the same time on
the television screen.

Result:
or buttons, until the Manual

Result:

option.

Result:
You can rearrange the Station Table and give different

programme numbers to the stations listed according to your own
preferences.
Changing the Preset Station Table
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
DELETE : CLEAR
VCR
Press the OK button to select this option.

Result:
Press the or buttons, until the TV System option is
selected.
3
4

Result:
Press the or buttons, until the VCR Output CH option
is selected.
3
4
. . CH36
. . CH69

Then tune your television again (see page 14).
CH21
Select the required output channel (CH21~CH69) by pressing

the OK or buttons.

option.

Result:
Your DVD-VCR output channel may need to be changed if the

pictures suffer from interference or if your TV cannot find the
pictures.
Also, you can change the DVD-VCR output channel to adjust the
frequency in which information is displayed on the screen.
Setting the DVD-VCR Output Channel
Press the OK or button to select G or K.

option.

Result:
You can choose the sound mode (B/G or D/K) according to the
TV set connected to your VCR.
Selecting the RF OUT Sound Mode (B/G-D/K)
Manual Setup
TV System
VCR Output CH
Auto Setup
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Manual Setup
TV System
VCR Output CH
Auto Setup
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Install
:G
: CH 36
: Off
: On
: English
23
Install
VCR
:G
: CH 36
: Off
: On
: English
VCR
CH 21
:
CH 36
:
CH 69
GB
4-45
4-46
GB
24
: Auto
: On
: On
Colour System
NICAM
IPC
: Off
: On
: English
User Set
Auto
PAL
MESECAM
B/W
Black and White
On completion, press RETURN three time to exit the menu.
B/W
Press the Ok or button to select Auto PAL MESECAM

B/W.
buttons, until the Colour
Press the corresponding or

System option is selected.

Result:

option.
When you playback an NTSC-recorded tape on this DVDVCR make a setting on the colour system according to
your TV. If your TV is a PAL system only TV, set NTPB.
If your TV is Multi System TV (NTSC 4.43 compatible), set
NT4.43 and you can record NT4.43.

Result:
Before recording or playing back a cassette, you can select the

required system standard.
Selecting the Colour Mode
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
VCR
4
or
buttons, until the NICAM
On is displayed.
On: Normally set at this position.
NICAM mode
Off is displayed.
Off: Only set at this position to record
the standard mono sound during a
NICAM broadcast if the stereo sound
is distorted due to inferior reception
conditions.
Mono mode
To...

option is selected.

option.
Result:
2
3

Result:
NICAM programmes are divided into 3 types. NICAM Stereo,

NICAM Mono and Bilingual (transmission in another language).
NICAM programmes are always accompanied by a standard
mono sound broadcast and you can select the desired sound.
Please refer to page 38.
NICAM
: Auto
: On
: On
NICAM
IPC
: Off
: On
: English
Colour System
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
25
User Set
VCR
On
Off
GB
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
GB
26
User Set
On
Off

You can also directly Select function suing IPC button

on the remote control.
On completion, press the RETURN button.

Press the corresponding or buttons, until the IPC option is

selected.
To adjust the sharpness manually, press the OK or button to

turn the IPC mode OFF.

Result:

option.
Press the OK or button to select IPC (Intelligent Picture

Control) option.
When intelligent picture control mode is ON, the sharpness
of the image is adjusted automatically.
Press the OK or .
Result:
During playback, press the MENU button on the remote control.
The Intelligent Picture Control Feature allows you to adjust the

sharpness of the image automatically, according to your own
preferences.
On completion, press the IPC button again.


To adjust the sharpness manually, select Intelligent Picture

Control mode OFF.
The horizontal picture adjusting appears.
When Intelligent Picture Control mode is ON , the

sharpness of the image is adjusted automatically.
Press the button to turn the IPC (Intelligent Picture Control)

option ON and OFF.
During playback, press the IPC button.

The PICTURE menu is displayed.
Result:
Intelligent Picture Control ( Remote Control )
: On
: On
NICAM
IPC
VCR
: Auto
Colour System
: Off
: On
: English
Intelligent Picture Control
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
VCR
buttons, until the Auto
1Hour
2Hour
3Hour
Off
Press the OK or buttons, until you select the time of Auto

Power Off interval.
Power Off option is selected.
or

Result:
The Auto Power Off feature automatically turns off your DVDVCR if no signal is received and you do not press any button for
the selected time.
Auto Power Off
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
: Off
: On
: English
: Off
: On
: English
27
VCR
Off
1Hour
2Hour
3Hour
GB
4-47
GB
4-48
28
: E180
: Off
: Off
Repeat Play
S-VHS
: Off
: On
: English
Tape Select
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
On
Off
On is displayed.
Off is displayed.
Display on-screen information
Hide on-screen information
To...
Press the corresponding or buttons, until the Screen

Messages option is selected.

Result:
VCR Setup
E180
E240
E260
E300
buttons, until the Tape
E240
E260
Press RETURN twice to exit the menu.
E180
E 300
Press the OK or buttons as many times as required, until the

correct cassette length is displayed.
or

Result:
Select option is selected.
After pressing the MENU press the corresponding

If you wish to use the tape counter to display the time remaining
on a cassette, you must indicate the type of cassette inserted.
Selecting the Cassette Type
: Off
: On
: English
Your DVD-VCR displays most information on both the DVD-VCR

and the television.
You can choose to display or hide this information on the
television screen (except for the SEARCH, Programming MENU
and
Timer functions, which cannot be hidden).
Screen Messages
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Language
VCR
VCR
or
Off is displayed.
On is displayed.
buttons, until the Repeat
Do not wish to repeat play
Repeat play
To...
Off is displayed.
To watch S-VHS tapes, set the S-VHS mode to On in the VCR
Setup.
On is displayed.
Do not wish to S-VHS play
S-VHS play
To...
Press the corresponding or buttons, until the S-VHS

option is selected.

Result:
Press the corresponding , buttons to select the VCR option.
During S-VHS play mode, press the MENU.
The DVD-VCR allows you to playback high quality S-VHS tapes.
S-VHS Play
3
Play option is selected.

Result:
After pressing the MENU, press the corresponding

You can set repeat play to repeat the tape continuously from
beginning to end.
Repeat Play
: English
: E180
: Off
: Off
Repeat Play
S-VHS
: Off
: On
VCR Setup
29
VCR Setup
VCR
: Off
: Off
: E180
: Off
: On
: English
Tape Select
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
Repeat Play
S-VHS
Tape Select
User Set
Auto Power Off
Screen Messages
Install
Language
VCR
Off
On
Off
On
GB
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
GB
260 mins. or
4 hours and 20 mins.
E-300
30
E-260
E-180
E-240
Recording Time (in SP)
Press the SPEED button on the

remote control, until...
SP is displayed.
LP is displayed.
To record a cassette...
In standard play mode

In long play mode
Each cassette lasts twice as long

The recording is of a slightly lower quality
LP (Long Play)
In Long Play modes:
SP (Standard Play)
You can record a cassette at two different speeds:
Selecting the Recording Speed
Type
VCR
To re-record over a protected cassette (safety tab broken),

cover the hole with adhesive tape.
If you wish to protect a cassette, break off the tab using a small
screwdriver.

used).
Result:
Select:

or
To stop recording, press once.
If your DVD-VCR ejects the cassette when you start

recording, check to make sure that the cassettes
safety tab is intact or that the opening (created by a
broken safety tab) is covered with adhesive tape.
If you reach the end of the tape while recording, the
cassette rewinds automatically.
Hold REC ( ) down for a while to start recording.

The record indicator appears on the television and
Result:
DVD-VCR display. An index is recorded on the tape
(see page 37).

The LINE1, LINE2 source using the INPUT SEL. button for
a satellite tuner or external video source
Result:
The station number is displayed and the programme
can be seen on the television.
Before recording a programme, you must have preset the corresponding station (unless you are recording via an external video
source). If you have not done so, refer to pages 19 and 20.
Recording a Programme Immediately
Video cassettes have a safety tab to prevent accidental erasure.

When this tab has been removed, you cannot record on the tape.
Protecting a Recorded Cassette
31
VCR
VCR
GB
4-49
GB
4-50
32
STANDBY/ON PHONES
COPY
PROG
LENGTH 2:30
S.MODE
P.SCAN
SELECT
EJECT
VOL

Result:
Select:

or
Press the REC ( ) button several times to increase the

recording time in:
30-minute intervals up to four hours
1-hour intervals up to nine hours

The length is displayed on the television displays.
Result:
The selected programme is recorded for the length
of time requested. At the end of that time, the DVDVCR stops recording automatically and power off.
If you wish to cancel the recording before the end, press

STANDBY/ON.
This function is not available in DVD recording
If the end of the tape is reached while recording:

The recording stops and power off.
Hold the REC ( ) button down for a while to start recording.

The record indicator appears on the television
Result:
screen and DVD-VCR display. An index is recorded
on the tape (see page 38).

The LINE1, LINE2 source using the INPUT SEL. button for
a satellite tuner or external video source
Result:
The channel number is displayed and the
programme can be seen on the television.

used).
Your DVD-VCR stops automatically after the requested length of

time.
This function enables you to record up to nine hours (LP) of

programmes.
Recording a Programme with Automatic Stop
SET LENGTH :
PRESS REC
REC
VCR
Press to select the recording day.

Select the required day by pressing the or buttons.
Press to select the recording start time.
Select the required hour value by pressing the or buttons.
4
5
6
7
Select the required minute value by pressing the

buttons.
Press to select the recording stop time.
Select the required recording stop time by pressing the or

buttons, following the same procedure as when selecting the
recording start time.
Press to select the recording speed.
Press the or buttons to select the SP (Standard Play), LP
(Long Play), Auto (Auto Tape Speed Select) recording speeds.
When you have finished, press the RETURN button.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Auto Tape Speed Select. The DVD-VCRs Auto Tape

Speed Select function compares the duration of the
timer recording to the actual recording time remaining
on the tape loaded. If there is insufficient tape to
complete a timer recording in AUTO mode, the DVDVCR automatically switches to LP mode to record the
whole programme.

Before starting recording, the DVD-VCR compares
Result:
the timer duration with the remaining time on the
cassette.
Press to select the minutes.
Select the required station or input source (LINE1, LINE2 or

AUX ) by pressing the , buttons.
or
Press OK or to select the input source.
Insert the cassette and press TIMER on the remote control.

The Timer Method menu is displayed.
Result:
Before presetting a recording, check that the date and

time are correct.
The Timer Programming feature allows you to preset the DVDVCR to record a programme up to one month before that
programme is to be broadcast. Up to six programmes can be
preset.
Using the Timer Programming Feature
PR
Start
Stop
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
WE 01 19 : 00 19 : 30
Day
Standard
SP
Speed
33
Off
V/P
Timer Method
VCR
GB
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
GB
34
PR
SP
Speed
Stop
Start
WE 01 19 : 00 19 : 30
Date
Off
V/P

Result:
Press the or buttons to select the required programme.
Press the or buttons to select and change any values as

required. For more details, refer to the previous page.
If you have forgotten which programmes will be

recorded
When you have finished presetting the DVD-VCR
You can check your preset recordings:
Off
V/P
Select the programme to be cancelled by pressing the or

buttons.
Press the CLEAR button to cancel the selected programme.

All the recording information is deleted and the
Result:
broadcast will not be recorded.

Result:
No longer required
Incorrect
You can cancel any programmes that are:
Cancelling a Preset Recording
SP
WE 01 19 : 00 19 : 30
Speed
Start
Checking a Preset Recording
Stop
Date
VCR
PR
VCR
Eject the cassette
(EJECT).
(STOP).
Then press...
When a cassette is loaded, the tape position is optimized

automatically to reduce disturbance (Digital Auto
Tracking).
When playing a cassette, if the end of the tape is
reached, the cassette is rewound automatically.
Stop the playback
To...
Insert the video cassette to be played. If the safety tab on the

cassette is intact, press ll.
Otherwise, the cassette is played automatically.
Switch on both the television and your DVD-VCR.
Result:
The tracking bar disappears when you release the button.
The image is adjusted.
The tracking bar appears.
When noise bars or streaks appear during playback, adjust alignment

manually by pressing the TRK ( or ) buttons until the picture is clear
and stable.
The Picture Adjustment feature allows you to adjust the

alignment manually to obtain the best possible picture.
Adjusting Picture Alignment Manually
This function allows you to play back any pre-recorded cassette.
Playing a Cassette
P.SCAN
SELECT
VOL
EJECT
35
VCR
VCR
GB
4-51
GB
4-52
36
VCR
LR
VCR
MONO
MIX
Used to listen to the sound on the normal mono

channel.
MONO
When playing back tapes recorded in Hi-Fi, the

sound switches to Hi-Fi after five seconds of
Mono.
To select the sound mode, simply press the AUDIO button on the
remote control until the required option is displayed.
Used to listen to Hi-Fi stereo sound on the left and right

channels.
Used to listen to the mixed sound of the Hi-Fi and

normal channels.
MIX
LR
Used to listen to the sound on the right Hi-Fi channel.
No sound is heard when playing back a cassette in slow

motion.
to start SLOW mode.

or button as many times as required to decrease or
Cassette
Video heads
When you have been using the Slow Motion function

for more than about two minutes, the DVD-VCR will
automatically play to protect the:
When playing back in slow motion, picture interference may

occur.
Press the TRK ( or ) buttons to minimize this effect.
increase the speed respectively

To return to the normal speed, press the ll button twice.
ll to start playing the cassette

ll button one more time to make still mode.
Press:
You can play a cassette in slow motion.
Playing a Cassette in Slow Motion
Used to listen to the sound on the left Hi-Fi channel.
Description
Option
You can select the mode in which the sound is reproduced on the
loudspeakers and AV outputs. The following options are
available.
Selecting the Audio Output Mode
No sound is heard when playing a sequence at variable

speeds.
SHUTTLE (<<) to play the cassette backwards

SHUTTLE (>>) to play the cassette forwards
ll during playback
REVERSE REVERSE REVERSE

PLAY
PLAY
PLAY
X9
X5
X3
STILL
SLOW
MOTION
X1/10
SLOW
MOTION
X1/5
PLAY
PLAY
X3
PLAY
X5
PLAY
X9
Each time you press a SHUTTLE button, the speed is changed

as shown in the following illustration.
Press:
The Shuttle function is available on the Remote control
You can vary the playback speed using the Shuttle function (up to
nine times the normal speed).
You wish to analyze a sportspersons technique,
Example:
movement by movement.
Playing a Sequence at Variable Speeds
37
VCR
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
38
VCR
etc.
This DVD-VCR uses a standard indexing system (VISS).

As a result, it will recognize any indexes marked by
other VCRs using the same system and vice versa.
Seq.
played
Seq.
Press the OK or .

buttons, until the End Search option is selected.
Press the OK or .
or
Use this feature when you want to search for a blank position to record
a program on a cassette.
The VCR will fast forward, searching for a blank position, and then
automatically stop at that position.If the VCR reaches the end of the tape
during end search, the tape will be ejected.
End Search
After pressing the SEARCH, press the corresponding or

buttons, until the Go To (0:00:00) option is selected.
Use this feature when you want to search for the 0:00:00 counter
position on a cassette. Press the CLEAR button at the point on the tape
where you want to set the counter to 0:00:00.
The VCR will rewind or fast forward, searching for the 0:00:00 counter
position, and then automatically stop at that position.
Go To 0:00:00 Stop
Next
Seq. being
Prev
etc.
The Search function allows you to fast-forward or rewind to a

specific index and start playback from that point. Depending on
the direction selected, the indexes are numbered as follows:
Each time you record a cassette on this DVD-VCR, an index is

automatically marked on the tape when recording starts.
If you want to watch the tape from a particular Index, simply

press II.
When an Index mark is found the DVD-VCR will playback the

tape for 5 seconds, after which it will continue searching for the
next Index mark.
or
To cancel an Index search simply press the II or button.
These Index searches can be made forwards: (press ) or

backwards: (press ). ( -20
0
+20
Press the or buttons twice more.

This will take you directly to the start of the desired programme
is located.
or
Press the OK or .

Index Skip Search:

This feature will enable you to fast forward/rewind to a specific
point on a tape: E.g. if you have recorded 3 different
programmes on a tape and you have rewound the tape to the
beginning, by using this feature you can go directly to the start of
programme 2 simply by pressing the SEARCH button.
Press the or buttons depending on the direction

where your desired programme is located.
Press the OK or .
2
3

Intro Scan
INDEX SEARCH :
INTRO SCAN :
- 06
39
VCR
GB
4-53
GB
4-54
40
VCR
0:00:00
When you are ready,

Start playback or Recording.
Press the button.
To fast-froward or rewind to the sequence at which the
counter was set to zero, press or .
Press INFO.:
Once to display the current function, programme
number, recording speed, date, time and counter
Twice to display the counter only
Three times to display the time remaining on the
cassette
Four times to clear the display
Some DVD-VCR information, such as the counter, can

be displayed on the television screen (unless you have
deactivated the Screen messages mode; refer to page 28).
To set the tape counter to zero at the beginning of a sequence:

Press INFO. twice to display the counter
Press CLEAR when you want to set the tape counter to
zero
Insert a cassette in your DVD-VCR.
If the remaining time is to be calculated correctly, you

must indicate the type of cassette being used.
Allows you to find the beginning of a sequence easily
Indicates the elapsed time in the play and record

modes (hours, minutes and seconds)
Is reset when a cassette is inserted in the DVD-VCR
The tape counter:
Using the Tape Counter
Take care to respect the colour coding of the left and right
channels.
Plug the other end of the audio cable into the appropriate output
connectors on the other system (VCR, camcorder or Hi-Fi
sound system).
Connect one end of the RCA audio cable supplied into the
AUDIO INPUT sockets on the rear of the DVD-VCR.
Plug the other end of the video cable into the appropriate output
connector on the other system (VCR or camcorder).
2
3
Connect one end of the RCA video cable into the VIDEO INPUT
socket on the rear of the DVD-VCR.
Make sure that both the television and the DVDVCR are switched off before connecting the cables.
Examples: You wish to copy a video cassette with the help of

a second VCR .
You wish to play back and/or copy pictures taken
with a camcorder .
You can connect other audio/video equipment to your DVD-VCR

using audio/video cables if the appropriate outputs are available
on the equipment chosen.
Connecting an RCA Audio/Video Input Cable
RF
RF
DVD & VCR
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
LINE
IN
LINE
IN
DVD & VCR
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
LINE
OUT
LINE
OUT
AUDIO
AUDIO
VIDEO
VIDEO
41
VCR
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
42
STANDBY/ON PHONES
REC
VCR
S.MODE
COPY
PROG
P.SCAN
SELECT
EJECT
VOL
Insert the pre-recorded cassette in the other video source (VCR

or camcorder).
Press the INPUT SEL. button to select the appropriate input on

your DVD-VCR: LINE IN for the RCA input.
Start playing back the cassette to be copied.
Hold REC () down for a while to start recording on your

DVD-VCR.
When you have finished recording, press on both VCR and

DVD-VCR.
7
If you wish to view the cassette being copied:
Your DVD-VCR must be connected as usual to the
television (see page 11 for further details)
Insert a blank cassette in your DVD-VCR.
Connect the DVD-VCR, from which the cassette is to be copied,

to the appropriate RCA audio and video input connectors on the
rear of your DVD-VCR, as indicated on page 11.
It is an infringement of copyright laws to copy

prerecorded cassettes or to re-record them in any form
without the permission of the owners of the
corresponding copyright.
You can copy a cassette to your DVD-VCR from another video

source, such as another VCR or a camcorder.
Recording from Another VCR or Camcorder
Press A.DUB.
Result:
Your DVD-VCR is now in the Audio dubbing Still mode.
On the sound system, locate the point on the cassette at which
you wish to start playback.
Example: The track that you wish to record on the cassette.
When you are ready:
Start playback on the sound system
Press the REC ( ) on the remote control.

The soundtrack is replaced on the pre-recorded
Result:
cassette.
The audio dubbing will finish when the counter reaches 0:00:00.
7
8
10
The new sound will be recorded on the normal sound

track of the tape, and the original sound will remain on
the Hi-Fi sound track.
To hear the new sound and original sound mixed
together, press the Audio button on the remote control
until the MIX option is displayed (see page 37).
Press the ll button.

Press the ll button one more time to make Still mode.
Search back slightly beyond the Audio Dubbing start point using
the button.
Search for the Audio Dubbing (ending) point using the , and
set the counter to 0:00:00 by pressing INFO. and CLEAR.
4
5
Insert the pre-recorded cassette on which the audio track is to

be replaced, and press the ll to start playback.
Connect the other end of the RCA audio cable to the audio input
connectors (L, R) on the rear of your DVD-VCR.
2
3
Connect an RCA audio cable to the appropriate output on your

sound system (cassette player for example).
Audio dubbing is applicable only to the longitudinal audio track

(normal audio).
Restriction:
A cassette player
A microphone connected to a sound system
A CD, DVD
With the Audio Dubbing function, you erase the previously

recorded sound and replace it with a new soundtrack from:
Audio Dubbing a Pre-recorded Cassette
RF
DVD & VCR
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
RADIO ANT.
LINE
IN
LINE
OUT
AUDIO
A.DUB
-0:05:23
VIDEO
43
VCR
GB
4-55
GB
4-56
44
VCR
Codes
02, 20, 22
13, 14, 22 to 24
15, 16
13, 14, 24
07, 16 to 19, 21
When you change the batteries in the remote control, you

must reprogramme the code, following the same
procedure.
If several codes are indicated for your television brand, try

each one in turn until you find one that works.
Used to adjust the volume of the television.

Used to select the required programme.
VOL + or
PROG/TRK
( or )
The various functions will not necessarily work on all

televisions. If you encounter problems, operate the
television directly.
Used to mute the volume of the television.
Used to select an external source.
INPUT SEL.
Used to switch between the TV and VCR

modes.
TV or VCR
TV MUTE
Used to switch the television on and off.
Function
STANDBY/ON
Button
You can then control the television using the following buttons.
Brand
PHILIPS
SABA
SONY
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
If your television is compatible with the remote control,

it will switch off. It is now programmed to operate with
the remote control.
01 to 06
09, 23
09, 17, 21
02
08, 23 to 27
SAMSUNG
AKAI
GRUNDIG
LOEWE
PANASONIC
Result:
Codes
Brand
Hold down the TV button and enter the two-figure code

corresponding to the brand of your television, by pressing the
appropriate numeric buttons.
Point the remote control towards the television.
Switch your television on.
To determine whether your television is compatible, follow the

instructions below.
Your DVD-VCR remote control will work with Samsung

televisions and compatible brands.
Using the TV Buttons on the Remote Control
Component
Jack
OMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Television
or
Connection to an Television
Super Jack
S-VIDEO OUT
Television
45
DVD
The following show examples of connections commonly used to connect the DVD -VCR player with
a TV and other components. It is only available for DVD. The VCR out can not watch by this
connection.
Choosing a Connection
GB
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
GB
46
Disc Menu
Disc Menu
Audio
Subtitle
Disc Menu Language
: English
: English
: Automatic
Language Setup

OK or button.
Select Disc Menu using , buttons, then press the OK or

button.

- Select Others if the language you want is not listed.

- English is selected and the screen returns to DVD menu.
Select DVD using , buttons, then OK or button
This function changes the text language only on the disc

menu screens.
Using the Disc Menu Language
If you set the player menu, disc menu, audio and subtitle language
in advance, they will come up automatically every time you
watch a movie.
Setup
Setup
Setup :
Display Setup
DVD
Select Language Setup using , buttons, then press the OK

or button.
Select Audio using , buttons, then press the OK or
3
4


Select Language Setup using , buttons, then press the OK
or button.
Select Subtitle using , buttons, then press the OK or
button.
- Select Automatic if you want the subtitle language to be the
same as the language selected as the audio preference.
Some discs may not contain the language you
select as your initial language; in that case the disc will use its
original language setting.
1
2
3
4
5
Using the Subtitle Language
Press the , buttons to select English .

- Select Original if you want the default soundtrack language to
be the original language the disc is recorded in.
button.
Using the Audio Language
Setup
Setup
Setup :
Display Setup
Subtitle
Disc Menu
Audio
Subtitle
Disc Menu
Audio
Subtitle
Automatic
47
Subtitle Language
: English
: English
: Automatic
Language Setup
: English
: English
: Automatic
Language Setup
DVD
GB
4-57
GB
4-58
48
Center SPK Time Delay

Surround SPK Time Delay
: 0ms
: 0ms
OK or button.
How
to make the SETUP menu disappear or return to
menu screen during set up; Press RETURN or button.
Dynamic Compression
- On : To select dynamic compression.
- Off : To select the standard range.
Center SPK Time Delay (See Page 66)
Surround SPK Time Delay (See Page 66)
Select Audio Setup using , buttons, then press the OK or

button.
Setting Up the Audio Options
Setup
Setup
Setup :
Display Setup
DVD
How to make the SETUP menu disappear or return to menu

screen during set up; Press RETURN or button.
If you have forgotten your password, see Forget Password in
the Troubleshooting Guide. (See page 74)
About the Change Password ;

- Use , to select Change Password.
Press OK. The Change Password screen appears.
- Ok your new password. Re-ok the new password again.
Enter your password. The Re-Enter Password

screen appears to confirm the password.
Ok your password again. The Parental Setup screen appears.
About the Rating Level ;

The Rating Level will work only when Use Password is set
to Yes. To unlock the player, OK or to select No. Use
, to select Rating Level. Press OK
- Use , to select the level(e.g. Level 6) and press OK.
Discs that contain Level 7 will now not play.
- To cancel the rating level, use OK or to select No in Use
Password.
Use OK or to select Yes if you want to use a password.

The Enter Password screen appears.
Select Parental Setup using , buttons, then press the OK

or button.
2
3
The Parental Control function works in conjunction with DVDs

that have been assigned a rating - which helps you control the
types of DVDs that your family watches.
There are up to 8 rating levels on a disc.
Setting Up the Parental Control
Use Password
Setup
Setup
Setup :
Display Setup
: No
Yes
49
Parental Setup
DVD
No
Yes
GB
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
GB
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DVD Only
50
NTSC Disc Output

NTSC if the screen only has one NTSC-video entrance.
If this is not the case, you can choose to leave PAL 60Hz
as is.
DVD Output
Component : Sends COMPONENT signal (Y, Pb, Pr) to
the component video out JACK.
Video : - Sends COMPOSITE VIDEO signal to Scart JACK.

- Sends COMPONENT INTERLACE signal from
COMPONENT JACK.
S-Video : Sends S-VIDEO signal to the S-VIDEO OUT JACK.
Black Level
Adjusts the brightness of the screen.(On/Off)
FRONT L
SURROUND L
FRONT R
1SURROUND R
SPEAKERS
CENTER
WOOFER
Connect an S-Video cable from the S-Video Out on the back panel
of the DVD-VCR to the S-Video Input on your television.
Connect S-Video Out to TV
The S-Video is only for the DVD player. The tuner and VCR will
still be viewed through the RF or line inputs.
You must follow the DVD Out instructions above to activate
your alternative (S-Video) video selection.
If your television is equipped with S-Video input, you can enjoy
superior video quality when watching DVDs with your DVD-VCR.
S-Video Connections (for DVD)
: PAL 60Hz
: Component
: 4:3 L-Box
DVD
TV Aspect
Black Level
NTSC Disc Output
DVD Out
Display Setup
TV Aspect
Depending on the type of television you have, you may want
to adjust the screen setting (aspect ratio).
1. 4:3 Letter Box :
Select when you want to see the total 16:9 ratio screen DVD
supplies, even though you have a TV with a 4:3 ratio screen.
Black bars will appear at the top and bottom of the screen.
2. 4:3 Pan Scan :
Select this for conventional size TVs when you want to see
the central portion of the 16:9 screen. (Extreme left and right
side of movie picture will be cut off.)
3. 16:9 Wide :
You can view the full 16:9 picture on your widescreen TV.
OK or button.
buttons, then press the OK
Select Display Setup using

or button.
Setting Up the Display Options
Setup
Setup
Setup :
Display Setup
DVD
To deactivate Progressive Scan, press the P.SCAN button again.

pressed again, a blue LED will light up and Progressive Scan
mode will be canceled. Select another mode as your TV's AV input
to view another output of the DVD-VCR.
This is available only for a TV set that supports Progressive Scan.

While Progressive Scan is active, video, S-video, and SCART
output are not available.
To activate Progressive Scan, the DVD-VCR must be in Stop
mode.
Press the P.SCAN button on the front panel.

pressed, a blue LED will light up and the following message will be
displayed:
To activate Progressive Scan, press OK.
The following message will be displayed and then the picture will
be played in Progressive Scan mode.
Set your TV to COMPONENT.

Select component input as your TV's AV input. At this point, even
if the picture appears reddish, it is normal.
the picture will appear reddish or bluish.
If you mix up the connections when connecting the component cable,
Connect the component output of the DVD player to your TV set.

Use the component cable to connect the component output on the
back panel of the DVD-VCR to the component input of your TV.
What is Progressive Scan?

It is a set of jacks that can provide sharp and clear picture
quality by using twice the number of fields of lines than
component output.
Component video output is available only for DVD playback. RF

and Line input are available for Tuner and VCR playback.
If your TV set supports Progressive Scan, it can transmit Pr, Pb, and
Y signals separately, so you can enjoy sharp and clear picture.
Component Connections (for DVD)
DVD Only
SURROUND R
FRONT R
FRONT L
SURROUND L
SPEAKERS
CENTER
WOOFER
Please set your TV to component

input. If your TV doesn't have
Progressive scan mode, there will
be no signal on the screen.
Press "OK" to confirm

Prorgessive scan mode.
Otherwise press "RETURN".
51
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
DVD
GB
4-59
GB
4-60
52
DVD
The picture will still and the audio will mute.

To resume playback, press the ll (Play/Still) button.
If the player is left in Still mode for 5 minutes, it will stop
automatically.
Skip Forward will jump to the next chapter/track.

Skip Back will jump to the beginning of the current
chapter/track.
Press Skip Back again to jump to the beginning of the
previous chapter/track.
Each press increases the slow motion speed playback to 1/8,

1/4 or 1/2 normal speed.
Audio is muted during slow motion playback.
Slow function operates only in the forward direction
Slow function is not available for CD
Press the Stop button once to stop playback. To resume the

DVD/CD from the point where the disc stopped, press the ll
(Play/Still) button.
Press the (Stop) button twice to completely stop playback.
The next time you press ll (Play/Still), the disc will start over
from the beginning.
Stop/Resume
During playback, press the ll (Play/Still) button to Still the

image. Then use the Search Forward ( ) to play in slow motion
at variable speeds.
Slow Motion
While a disc is in Play mode, press and hold the Forward/Back

( /) buttons on the remote control or front panel to visually
search forward/backward at 2X - 4X - 8X - 16X - 32X - 128X
speed. Press ll (Play/Still) button to resume normal speed.
Search Forward/Back
While a CD or DVD disc is in Play mode, press the Skip

Forward/Back (l / l) buttons on the remote control or front
panel to jump forward and backward through disc
chapters/tracks.
Skip Forward/Back
Audio is muted during Frame Advance mode.

Press ll (Play/Still) to resume normal playback.
NOTE: Frame Advance operates only in the forward direction.
While in playback mode, press the F.ADV/STEP button on the

remote control to advance one frame at a time.
Frame Advance (Step)
Press the ll (Play/Still) button on the remote control during

playback.
Still
During DVD/CD playback you can select from the following

special playback options. To resume normal playback, press the
ll (Play/Still) button.
Special Playback Features
DVD
Vertical Fit
Zoom Fit
53
Screen Fit
Normal Wide
Displays the content of the DVD title in 16:9 aspect ratio. The picture will look horizontally stretched.
Zoom Fit
Screen Fit
The top and bottom of the screen are cut off. When playing a 2.35:1 aspect ratio disc, the black bars at the top
and bottom of the screen will disappear. The picture will look vertically stretched. (Depending on the type of disc,
the black bars may not disappear completely.)
Wide Screen
Press the EZ VIEW button.

The screen size changes when the button is pressed repeatedly.
The screen zoom mode operates differently depending on the screen setting in the initial DVD menu.
To ensure correct operation of the EZ VIEW button, you should set the correct aspect ratio in the
initial setup (See page 48).
To play back using aspect ratio (DVD)
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
54
This function may behave differently depending on the type of disc.
Zoom Fit
Screen Fit
The top and bottom of the screen are cut off and the full screen appears. The picture would look vertically
stretched.
Normal Screen
Zoom Fit
Screen Fit
4:3 Pan Scan

The left and right of the screen are cut off and displays the central portion of the 16:9 screen.
4:3 Letter Box

The black bars will appear at the top and bottom of the screen.
DVD
Refers to the subtitle languages available in the disc.
Refers to the language of the film soundtrack. In the example, the

soundtrack is played in English 5.1CH. A DVD disc can have up to
eight different soundtracks.
* When in VCD 2.0 mode (MENU ON mode), this function does not work.
if you prefer, turn them off from the screen.

A DVD disc can have up to 32 different subtitles.
SUBTITLE You will be able to choose the subtitles language or,
AUDIO
TIME
Allows playback of the film from a desired time.

You must ok the starting time as a reference.
Most of DVD discs are recorded in chapters so that you can quickly
CHAPTER find a specific passage.
will be identified.
TITLE For example, if there is more than one movie on a DVD, each movie
To access the desired title when there is more than one in the disc.
What is a Title?
A DVD may contain several different titles. For example, if a
disc contains four different movies, each might be considered
a title.
What is a Chapter?
Each Title on a DVD is usually divided into chapters (similar
to tracks on an audio CD).
To make the screen disappear, press the INFO. button again.
Use the , buttons to make the desired setup.

You may use the number buttons of the remote control to
directly access a title, chapter or to start the playback from the
desired time.
2
3
During play, press the INFO. button on the remote.
When Playing a DVD
Using the Display Function (DVD/VCD/CD)
0~9
ENG
ENG
MOVE
ENG
ENG
MOVE
ENG
ENG
OK
OK
OK
55
DVD
GB
4-61
GB
4-62
56
Use the , buttons to select the desired screen angle.
To turn off the display, press the ANGLE button again.
On
Off
ENG
Use the , buttons to select the desired subtitle language.
Use the , buttons to determine whether or not the subtitle

will be displayed.
How to have the same subtitle language come up

when everyou play a DVD; Refer to Setting Up the
Language Features on page 46.
This function depends on what languages are encoded

on the disc and may not work with all DVDs.
A DVD disc can contain up to 32 subtitle languages.
Initially, the subtitling will not appear on screen.

The subtitle languages are represented by abbreviations.
Press the SUBTITLE button.
Using the SUBTITLE button
You can select a desired subtitle quickly and easily with the
subtitle button.
Selecting the Subtitle Language
When an ANGLE mark is shown, press the ANGLE button,

then an ANGLE select icon will appear at the upper left hand
corner of the screen.
Press the ANGLE button to see if an ANGLE (

) mark is
present at the upper Right hand corner of the screen.
When a DVD contains multiple angles of a particular scene, you

can select the Angle function.
Using the ANGLE button
Changing the Camera Angle
ENG
DVD
DVD
Select Chapter, Title or A-B using the , buttons.

During DVD play : press OK to zoom in 2X/4X/2X/Normal in
order.
During VCD play, press OK to zoom in 2X/normal in order.
Use the , or , button to select the part of the screen you

want to zoom in on.
2
3
During play or still mode, press the ZOOM button on the remote. A
square will be displayed on screen.
Using the Zoom (DVD/VCD)
When in VCD 2.0 mode (MENU ON), this function does not work. Use the
DISC MENU button in VCD 2.0 mode to select MENU ON or OFF.
Depending on the disc, the Repeat function may not work.
DVD repeats play by chapter or title, CD and VCD repeat play by disc or track.
To return to normal play, press REPEAT again, then press the ,

buttons to select Off and press OK.
It is available to press CLEAR button on the remote controller in
order to stop REPEAT play.
Press OK.
To terminate the function, press the 'CLEAR' button.

A-B REPEAT does not allow you to set point (B) until at least 5
seconds has elapsed after point (A) has been set.
Press OK at the point where you want the repeat play to stop
(B).
Press OK at the point where you want the repeat play to start
(A). The B is automatically highlighted.
Press the REPEAT button. Select A-B on screen with the ,

buttons.
Press the REPEAT button on the remote.

Repeat screen appears.
When playing a DVD
Repeat the current track, chapter, title, a chosen section (A-B), or

all of the disc.
Repeat Play
Off
Of
Off
VCD/CD
DVD
Track Disc A - B
DVD
Chapter Title A - B
57
DVD
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
Off
Of
58
Stereo
ENG DOLBY DIGITAL 5.1CH
VCD/CD
DVD
Open Repeat Menu
When you select Chapter Chapter will be highlighted.
track or disc.
DVD repeats play by chapter or title, VCD repeats play by
Press the OK button to repeat the title.
Repeat Title
Use the , buttons to select Title.

When you select Title Title will be highlighted.
Select Title
Press the OK button to repeat the current chapter.
Repeat Chapter
Use the , buttons to select Chapter.
Select Chapter
Press the REPEAT button while in Play mode to open the Repeat
menu.
The current Repeat mode will be highlighted.
How to have the same audio language come up whenever you

play a DVD ; Refer to Setting Up the Language Features on
page 46.
A DVD disc can contain up to 8 audio languages.
This function depends on what languages are encoded on the

disc and may not work with all DVDs.
Use the , buttons to select Stereo, or (On VCD/CD)
Use the , buttons to select the desired language on a DVD.

- The audio languages are represented by abbreviations.
Press the AUDIO button.
Using the AUDIO button
You can select a desired audio language quickly and easily with
the AUDIO button.
Selecting the Audio Language
Track Disc A - B
You can repeat a single chapter or a complete title.
Repeat Chapter/Title
Chapter Title A - B
DVD
Off
VCD/CD
DVD
DVD
When in VCD 2.0 mode (MENU ON), this function does not
work.
Depending on the disc, the mark function may not work.
Up to three scenes may be marked at a time.
Press the CLEAR button to delete a mark number.

Use the , buttons to select the mark number you want to

delete.
2
3
Clearing a Mark
Press the PLAY/STILL (ll ) buttons to skip to the marked

scene.

Use the , buttons to select a marked scene.
Recalling a Marked Scene
When you reach the scene you want to mark, press the OK
button. The icon will change to a number (1, 2, or 3).
Use the , buttons to move to the desired Mark icon.

The Mark icons will be displayed.
This feature lets you mark sections of a DVD or VCD (MENU OFF
mode) so you can quickly find them at a later time.
59
DVD
GB
4-63
GB
4-64
60
ROOT
CLASSIC
JPG
METAL
POP
WMA
WMAMP3
00:00:08
ROOT
DVD
OK
MP3
WMA
WMA
MP3
WMA
MP3
WMA
REPEAT
SONG1
SONG2
SONG3
SONG4
SONG5
SONG6
SONG7
..
SONG4
Off
ROOT
CLASSIC
JPG
METAL
POP
WMA
WMAMP3
Off
Press the button to stop playback.

Playback of MP3-CD track will stop.
Press the RETURN button to return to the initial MP3 menu.
Depending the MP3 disc, it may take longer to start playing.

The following types of data CDs can be played: ISO 9660 level
1, level 3, or Joliet format CD-ROMs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs;
discs recorded with a compression/decompression data rate
greater than 128Kbps; and discs containing files with the "MP3"
or "mp3" extension.
Multisession CDs with a blank segment and MP3 CD-Rs
encoded in VBR (Variable Bit Rate) format cannot be played.
MP3 files names should be 8 characters or less in length. Korean
characters or special characters cannot be displayed.
Each time you press the REPEAT button in PLAY mode, the
selection will switch a follows: Off Track Folder RANDOM
To change the album, press the button, and then press RETURN
button.
A list of albums in the MP3-CD will appear.
- To select another album and track, repeat Steps 2 and 3 above.
Use , buttons to select ALBUM, and then press the OK button.

Select the track, and then press the OK button. Playback
will start.
- To select the previous track or next track, press or .
Use , buttons to select the folder, and then press the OK button.
A list of albums in the folder will appear.
- To view the next album, press the RETURN button.
load the MP3 disc.
The MP3 menu screen will appear. Depending on the MP3 disc,
the appearance of the menu may be different.
Set the channel to "3" or use the TV/VIDEO button on the TV

to select the input source.
DVD mode.
Before You Begin...
Data CDs (CD-ROMs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs) encoded in MP3 (MPEG1 Audio

Layer 3) format can be played.
MP3-CD Playback
MP3-CD Playback

As the disc tray is closing, the screen will appear.
Depending on the recording mode, some WMA CDs cannot be played.
Use , to select the song you want to play.

To play back Press ll button.
To change the directory Press button, and then
- Press RETURN button to move to the upper most directory and use , to select the desired
folder.
To stop playback Press button.
To temporarily stop playback, Press ll button.
To resume playback, Press ll button.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to open the disc tray, and then load the disc.
61
DVD
Set the channel to "3" or use the TV/VIDEO button on the TV to select the input source.
Press the DVD button on the remote control to switch to DVD mode.
Before You Begin...
WMA Disc Playback
WMA Play
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
MP3/WMA Play
Samsung Electronics
62
This unit can play a maximum of 500 files and 300 folders per disc.
Important: The above recommendations cannot be taken as a guarantee that the DVD player will play MP3
recordings, or as an assurance of sound quality.
You should note that certain technologies and methods for MP3 file recording on CD-Rs prevent optimal playback
of these files on your DVD player (degraded sound quality and in some cases, inability of the player to read the
files).
Do not try recording copyright protected MP3 files.

Certain "securized" files are encrypted and code protected to prevent illegal copying. These files are of the
following types: Windows MediaTM (registered trade mark of Microsoft Inc) and SDMITM (registered trade mark of
The SDMI Foundation). You cannot copy such files.
Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 64Kbps when recording WMA files.
Sound quality with WMA files basically depends on the rate of compression/decompression you choose. Getting
audio CD quality sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion to WMA format, of at least
64Kbps and up to 192Kbps.
Conversely, files with decompression rates below 64Kbps or over 192Kbps will not be played properly.
Use a decompression transfer rate of at least 128 Kbps when recording MP3 files.
Sound quality with MP3 files basically depends on the rate of compression/decompression you choose. Getting
audio CD quality sound requires an analog/digital sampling rate, that is conversion to MP3 format, of at least 128
Kbps and up to 160 Kbps. However, choosing higher rates, like 192 Kbps or more, only rarely give better sound
quality.
Conversely, files with decompression rates below 128 Kbps will not be played properly.
When naming your MP3 or WMA files do not exceed 8 characters, and place ".mp3, .wma" as the file
extension.
General name format of: Title.mp3. or Title.wma. When composing your title, make sure that you use 8
characters or less, have no spaces in the name, and avoid the use of special characters including: (.,/,\,=,+).
Your MP3 or WMA files should be ISO 9660 or JOLIET format.

ISO 9660 format and Joliet MP3 or WMA files are compatible with Microsoft's DOS and Windows, and with
Apple's Mac. These two formats are the most widely used.
When you record MP3 files on the CD-R, please refer to the following.
CD-R MP3/WMA discs
DVD
Use the , / , buttons to select the first track to add to the

program.
Press the OK button. The selection numbers appear in the
Program Order box.
Press the PLAY/STILL ( II ) button.
The disc will be played in programmed order.
Use the , buttons to select PROGRAM.

This unit can support a maximum of 99 programmed

order.
PROGRAM/RANDOM playback cannot be used if the disc

contains more than two types of file extensions.
To resume normal play, press the CLEAR button.
Depending on the disc, the Program and Random Play

functions may not work.
Use the , buttons to select RANDOM. Press the OK button.

The disc will be played in random order.
Press the MODE button.
Random Play (CD/MP3/WMA)
Press the MODE button.
Program Play (CD/MP3/WMA)
Program Play & Random Play
01
05
09
13
03 04
07 08
11 12
15 16
PROGRAM
02
06
10
14
Track
PROGRAM
------
------
CLEAR
------
RANDOM
------
Program order
63
PROGRAM 01
RANDOM
DVD
GB
4-65
4-66
GB
64
JPG
JPG
JPG
JPG
JPG
JPG
RETURN
RETURN
486
483
Photo: 481/537
..
100K22
101K220
102K221
103K222
104K223
105K224
Off
ROOT
CLASSIC
JPG
METAL
POP
WMA
WMAMP3
Normal : The pictures change automatically at about a 12second interval.
Slow : The pictures change automatically at about a 18-second

interval.
Slide Show : Starts the slide show.
Fast : The pictures change automatically at about a 6-second

interval.
Zoom : Each time the OK button is pressed, the image will

enlarge up to 4X. (Normal N 2X N 4X N 2X N Normal)
Rotate : Each time the OK button is pressed, the image

will rotate clockwise 90 degrees.
- To view the previous 6 pictures, press ().
).
In the thumbnail screen
- To view the next 6 pictures, press (
Album: Displays thumbnail images.
Use , buttons on the remote control to select the picture

you want to view, and then press the OK button.
The screen shown in the middle will appear. (Press ll to switch to
Slide Show mode.)

As the disc tray is closing, the screen shown on the left will
appear.
load the disc.

DVD mode.
Before You Begin...
If no buttons on the remote control are pressed for 10 seconds, the menu will disappear. Press , or ,
buttons on the remote to display the menu again.
485
484
482
481
Album
Timer:
ROOT
CLASSIC
JPG
METAL
POP
WMA
WMAMP3
ROOT
Off
Picture CD Playback
DVD
DVD
If a number of folders in 1 Disc is over 300, only JPEG files in 300 folders can be played.
If a number of files in 1 Disc is over 500, only 500 JPEG file can be played.
Picture discs other than Kodak Picture CD may take longer to start playing or may not play at all.
When playing a Kodak Picture CD, only the JPEG files in the pictures folder can be played.
Only Kodak Picture CDs can be played.
A maximum of 500 images can be stored on a single CD.
the disc can be played only up to the blank segment.
65
Only a consecutively written multisession disc can be played. If there is a blank segment in the multisession disc,
characters (. / = +).
The name of the JPEG file may not be longer than 8 characters and should contain no blank spaces or special
Only CD-R discs with JPEG files in ISO 9660 or Joliet format can be played.
If the disc is not closed, it will take longer to start playing and not all of the recorded files may be played.
Only files with the ".jpg" and ".JPG" extensions can be played.
CD-R JPEG Discs
Picture CD Playback
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
66
Setting the Center Speaker
(B)=Df-Ds
Ideal Surround
Speaker Positions
Ideal Center Speaker

Position
Setting (ms)
0
1
2
3
4
5
Setting (ms)
0
3
6
9
12
15
Distance of (A) (m)

0.00
0.34
0.68
1.02
1.36
1.70
Distance of (B) (m)
0.00
1.02
2.04
3.06
4.08
5.10
If the distance of Df is equal to the distance of Ds in the figure, set the mode as 0ms.
Setting the Surround Speakers
(A)=Df-Dc
If the distance of Dc is equal to or longer than the distance of Df in the figure, set the mode as 0ms.
It is desirable to arrange all speakers

within this circle.
A delay effect can be added to the sound from the Center and Surround speakers to adjust the sound
according to the acoustic condition of the listening room. Initially, the delay time is set to 0 ms.
When 5.1CH Surround Sound is played, you can enjoy the best sound if the distance between you
and each speaker is the same. You can set the Delay Time in the Center/Surround Speakers to
customize the sound to the acoustic of your room.
Setting the Delay Time
DVD & VCR
RADIO ANT.
AM
FM
75
COAXIAL
IN
VIDEO
AUX
OUT
AUDIO
SURROUND R
FRONT R
SURROUND L
FRONT L
SPEAKERS
CENTER
WOOFER
DVD Only
S-VIDEO OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
SURROUND R
FRONT R
SURROUND L
FRONT L
SPEAKERS
CENTER
WOOFER
Please do not set up the Subwoofer near by TV or monitor because the Subwoofer is not fully
magnetic shielded.
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical. Place it anywhere you like.
Subwoofer
It is better to place these speakers so that their tweeters are at your ear level, facing inwards (about 45)
toward you.
Front Speakers
67
It is better to place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly downwards, about 24 to 35
inches (60-90 cm) above your ear.
If your listening position is too close to the rear wall, place these speakers at the left and right of the listening
position so that they face each other.
Surround Speakers
Ideally, the center speaker should be positioned at the same height as the front speakers, but it may be placed
above or below your TV set.
Center Speaker
RF
Ideal Speaker Arrangement
About Speaker Setup
GB
4-67
GB
4-68
SL
68
SURROUND SPEAKER
LEFT
SUB WOOFER
SPEAKER
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER SPEAKER
FL
1,2
FRONT SPEAKER
LEFT
SURROUND SPEAKER
RIGHT
SR
FRONT SPEAKER
RIGHT
FR
About Speaker Setup
Press AMP VOL + and AMP VOL - buttons to adjust the speaker
volume.
The volume can be adjusted to a level between 10 and +10.
Press the SPEAKER button.

Each time you press the button, the selection will change as
follows: FL C FR SR SL SU VOL.
While the subwoofer is being tested, a low bass sound of

100Hz or 125Hz will be heard.
While the test tone is being produced, you can use the VOL
buttons to set the speaker balance for the selected channel.
To end the speaker test, press the TEST button again.
In Stop mode, press the TEST button.

The test tone will be output to the speakers in the following
order: FL (Front Speaker/L) C (Center Speaker) FR (Front
Speaker/R) SR (Surround Speaker/R) SL (Surround
Speaker/L) SU (Subwoofer).
A hissing sound from a speaker indicates that the speaker is
installed correctly.
Use AMP VOL + and AMP VOL - buttons to adjust the bass or
treble of the speakers.
The bass or treble can be adjusted to a level between 10 and
+10.
Press the BASS or TREBLE button.

Each time you press the BASS or TREBLE button, the
corresponding setting will turn on or off.
To Set the Bass/Treble
To Test the Speakers
To Set the Speaker Balance
When you select a surround mode during playback of a

MP3, WMA or Audio CD, the 5.1-CH Surround Sound will
be selected.
During playback of a DVD encoded in 2 or more channels,

a surround mode cannot be selected.
Depending the type of disc being played, the effect of each

surround mode may vary.
Dolby Pro Logic II is new form of multi-channel audio signal

decoding technique that is improved from the existing Dolby
Pro Logic.
Dolby Pro Logic II separates Dolby Sound recordings as well as
regular stereo audio (video audio, TV broadcast, external input)
into 5.1 channels (front left and right, center, and surround left and
right) so you can enjoy regular audio signals with 6 speakers.
In addition, you can set different modes depending on the content
and format of audio and more accurately adjust the sound field.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Press the SOUND MODE button.

Each time you press the button, the mode will change as shown at
right.
4 STEREO/NATURAL/JAZZ/CONCERT/STADIUM These
effects are available in DSP mode.
- NATURAL : When listening to regular audio (TV/Radio)
- JAZZ : When listening to jazz or pop songs
- CONCERT : When listening to classical music
- STADIUM : When listening to live music or sports broadcast
- 4 STEREO : When listening to the sound field effect close to
the original sound
- STEREO : When listening to the original sound using the front
speakers and subwoofer
MATRIX./MOVIE/MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II) These effects
are available in Dolby Pro Logic II mode.
- MOVIE : Select this when watching a movie.
(You can experience the feeling of actually being at
the movies.)
- MUSIC : Select this when there are many musical elements.
(You can experience the feeling of actually being at a
live concert.)
- MATRIX : Select this if the source is regular audio.
(You can listen to mono tunes in 5.1-Ch Surround
mode.)
Sound Mode
Sound Mode Function
STEREO [STEREO]
4 STEREO [4 STEREO]
MA [MATRIX]
MUSIC [MUSIC]
MOVIE [MOVIE]
STA [STADIUM]
CON [CONCERT]
JAZZ [JAZZ]
NATURAL [NATURAL]
69
GB
Samsung Electronics
GB
Samsung Electronics
70
Listening to the Radio
Press l or l to tune in to a lower or higher frequency.
Automatic Tuning 3
Press and hold l or l to begin automatic tuning.
Automatic Tuning 2
Press PROG / button. A preset station will be selected on the

front panel display panel of the DVD-VCR.
Automatic Tuning 1
Tune in to the desired station.
Press the FM/AM button.

FM and AM.
You can either automatically or manually tune in to an FM or AM

station.
If the station you tuned in to is broadcasting in stereo,

"STEREO" will be displayed.
Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. You can store up to 20

FM and 10 AM stations by using the PROG / button.
Press the or OK button again to store 87-50 to FM 1.
Select the reception mode and then select the preset station
number.
Press the button or the OK button on the remote control. FM1

will blink on the display.
Use and to tune in to FM 87-50.
2
3
Press the FM/AM button to select "FM".

FM and AM.
You can store up to 30 stations (20 FM stations and 10 AM

stations).
Example: Storing an FM station of 87.50 MHz into the preset
station number 01
Presetting Stations
3.5
71
GB
4-69
MEMO
4-70
Samsung Electronics
5. Disassembly and Reassembly

5-1 Cabinet and PCB
5-1-1 Cabinet Top Removal
5-1-3 Assy Front Panel Removal
Lift up the Cabinet Top in the direction of arrow.
REMOVE
5 SCREWS
Fig. 5-1 Cabinet Top Removal
RELEASE 4 HOOKS
(Top View)
5-1-2 Bottom Cover Removal

RELEASE 2 HOOKS
RELEASE 3 HOOKS
(Bottom View)
Fig. 5-3 Assy Front Panel Removal
5-1-4 Function-Timer PCB Removal
Fig. 5-2 Bottom Cover Removal
RELEASE 5 HOOKS
Fig. 5-4 Function-Timer PCB Removal

Samsung Electronics
5-1
Disassembly and Reassembly
5-1-5 Chassis Removal

REMOVE 4 SCREWS
REMOVE 3 SCREWS
S.M.P.S. PCB
REMOVE 2 SCREWS
REMOVE 3 SCREWS
REMOVE 4 SCREWS
REMOVE 3 SCREWS
DVD DECK
VCR DECK
DVD MAIN PCB

VCR MAIN PCB
Fig. 5-5 Chassis Removal
5-1-6 VCR Main PCB Removal

REMOVE 3 SCREWS
When installing the ass'y full deck on the Main PCB,

be sure to align the assembly point of mode switch.
MODE SWITCH
ASSEMBLY POINT
Fig. 5-6 VCR Main PCB Removal

5-2
Samsung Electronics
FUNCTION-TIMER PCB
DVD MAIN PCB
S.M.P.S. PCB
VCR MAIN PCB
5-2 Circuit Board Locations
Fig. 5-7 Circuit Board Locations

Samsung Electronics
5-3
5-3 VCR Deck Parts Locations

5-3-1 Top View
Fig. 5-8 Top parts Location-1

GEAR FL CAM
MOTOR LOADING ASSY
LEVER FL ARM ASSY
HOLDER FL CASSETTE ASSY
LEVER FL DOOR
SLIDER FL DRIVE
5-4
Samsung Electronics
Fig. 5-9 Top Parts Location-2

FE HEAD
CYLINDER ASSY
ACE HEAD ASSY
LEVER UNIT PINCH ASSY
LEVER #9 GUIDE ASSY
LEVER TENSION ASSY
BAND BRAKE ASSY
Samsung Electronics
DISK S REEL
LEVER S BRAKE ASSY
GEAR IDLE
LEVER IDLE
LEVER T BRAKE ASSY
DISK T REEL
5-5
5-3-2 Bottom View
Fig. 5-10 Bottom Parts Location

GEAR JOINT 1
GEAR JOINT 2
BRAKET GEAR
MOTOR CAPSTAN ASSY
LEVER T LOAD ASSY
GEAR LOADING DRIVE
LEVER S LOAD ASSY
HOLDER CLUTCH ASSY
BELT PULLEY
SLIDER CAM
5-6
Samsung Electronics
5-4 VCR Deck

5-4-1 Holder FL Cassette Assy Removal
5-4-2 Lever FL Door Removal
1) Pull the Holder FL Cassette Ass'y to the eject

position.
2) Pull the Holder FL Cassette Ass'y as grasping
the Holder FL Cassette Ass'y and Lever FL
Cassette-R in the same time to release hooking
from Main Base until the Boss [A] of Holder FL
Cassette Ass'y is taken out from the Rail [B].
3) Lift the Holder FL Cassette Ass'y , in this time,
you have to grasp the Lever FL Cassette-R
Continuously until the Holder FL Cassette Ass'y
is taken out completely.
1) Release the Hook and Remove the Lever FL

Door in the direction of arrow C.
Note : Be sure to insert Lever FL Cassette-R in the

direction of A to prevent separation and breakage
of the Lever FL Cassette-R at disassembling and
reassembling.
LEVER FL DOOR
HOOK
"A"
"B"
Fig. 5-12 Lever FL Door Removal
RAIL [B]
HOLDER FL
CASSETTEE ASS`Y
"A" LEVER FL CASSETTEE -R

BOSS [A]
Fig. 5-11 Holder FL Cassette Assy Removal
Samsung Electronics
5-7
5-4-3 Slider FL Drive, Gear FL Cam Removal
5-4-4 Lever FL Arm Assy Removal
1) Pull the Slider FL Drive to the front direction.

2) Remove the Slider FL Drive in the direction of
arrow. (Refer to Fig. 5-13)
3) Remove the Gear FL cam .
1) Push the hole A in the direction of arrow B

use the pin.(about Dia. 2.5)
2) Pull out the Lever FL Arm Ass'y from the Boss
of Main Base.
3) Remove the Lever FL Arm Ass'y in the direction
of arrow C.
Note : When reinstalling be sure to reassemble Slider

FL drive after you insert the Boss of Lever FL
ARM-R in Groove of Slider Fl drive .
Assembly : Align the Gear FL Cam with the Gear

worm wheel Post as shown drawing.
(Refer to Timing point)
HOLE "A"
PIN
"B"
"C"
LEVER FL ARM ASS`Y
Fig. 5-15 Lever FL Arm Assy Removal
GEAR FL CAM
SLIDER FL DRIVE
Fig. 5-13 Slider FL Drive Removal
GEAR FL CAM
GEAR WORM WHEEL
POST
TIMING POINT
Fig. 5-14 Gear FL Cam, Gear Worm
5-8
Samsung Electronics
5-4-5 Gear Worm Wheel Removal
5-4-6 Cable Flat Removal
1) Remove the Gear Worm wheel .
1) Remove the Drum connecting part of Cable Flat

from Connector Waffer .
2) Remove the Loading Motor connecting part of
Cable Flat from Connector Waffer .
3) Rotate the Damper Capstan in the direction of
arrow A and remove it toward B.
4) Pull the Cable Flat in the direction of arrow C
to remove.
CABLE FLAT
LOADING MOTOR
CONNECTING PART
CYLINDER
CONNECTING PART
GEAR WORM WHEEL
"B"
DAMPER
CAPSTAN
"A"
CONNECTOR WAFER
"C"
Fig. 5-16 Gear Worm Wheel Removal
CONNECTOR WAFER
Fig. 5-17 Cable Flat Removal
Samsung Electronics
5-9
5-4-7 Motor Loading Assy Removal
5-4-8 Bracket Gear, Gear Joint 2, 1 Removal
1) Remove the screw .

2) Remove the Motor Loading Assy .
1) Remove the SCREW .

2) Remove the Bracket Gear .
3) Remove the Gear Joint 2 .
4) Remove the Gear Joint 1 .
MOTOR LOADING ASS`Y
Assembly :
1) Be sure to align dot mark of Gear Joint 1 with
dot mark of Gear Joint 2 as shown Fig 5-20.
(Refer to Timing point1)
2) Confirm the Timing Point 2 of the Gear Joint 2
and Slider Cam .
SCREW
GEAR JOINT 1
GEAR JOINT 2
Fig.5-18 Motor Loading Assy Removal
SCREW
BRAKET GEAR
Fig. 5-19 Bracket Gear, Gear Joint 1,2 Removal
GEAR JOINT1
GEAR JOINT2
SLIDER CAM
TIMING POINT 1
TIMING POINT 2
Fig. 5-20 Gear Joint 1,2 Assembly
5-10
Samsung Electronics
5-4-9 Gear Loading Drive, Slider Cam,

Lever Load S, T Assy Removal
5-4-10 Gear Loading Drive, Slider Cam,

Lever Load S, T Assy Assembly
1) Remove the Belt Pulley. (Refer to Fig. 5-38)

2) Remove the Gear Loading Drive after releasing
Hook [A] in the direction arrow as shown in detail
drawing.
3) Remove the Slider Cam .
4) Remove the Lever Load , Link Load & Lever
Load , Link Load .
1) When reinstalling, be sure to align dot of Lever

Load T Ass'y with dot of Lever Load S Ass'y
as shown in drawing, (Refer to Timing Point 1).
2) Insert the Pin A,B,C,D into the Slider Cam hole,
3) Be sure to align dot of Lever Load T and dot of
Gear Loading Drive , (Refer to Timing Point 2).
4) Aline dot of Gear Loading drive with mark of
Slider Cam as shown in drawing(Refer to
Timing Point 3).
HOOK(A)
GEAR LOADING DRIVE

TIMING POINT 1
SLIDE CAM
LEVER LOAD T
LEVER LOAD T
LEVER LOAD S
LINK LOAD T
LEVER LOAD S
LINK LOAD S
LEVER LOAD T
LEVER LOAD S
TIMING POINT 2
TIMING POINT 3
Fig. 5-21 Gear Loading Drive, Slider Cam,

Lever T, S Load Assy Removal
PIN A
PIN C
PIN D PIN B
SLIDER CAM
Fig. 5-22 Gear Loading Drive, Slider Cam,

Lever Load S, T Assy Assembly
Samsung Electronics
5-11
5-4-11 Lever Pinch Drive,

Lever Tension Drive Removal
5-4-12 Lever Tension Assy,

Band Brake Assy Removal
1) Remove the Lever Pinch Drive , Lever Tension

Drive .
1) Remove the Lever Brake S Ass'y (Refer to Fig 5-25).

2) Remove the Spring Tension Lever .
3) Rotate stopper of Main Base in the direction of
arrow A.
4) Lift the Lever Tension Ass'y & Band brake
Ass'y .
LEVER PINCH DRIVE
LEVER TENSION DRIVE
Note :
1) When replacing the Lever Tension Ass'y , be sure
to apply Grease on the post,
2) Take care not to touch stain on the felt side, and not
to be folder and broken Band brake Ass'y
3) After Lever Tension Ass'y seated, Rotate stopper of
Main Base to the Mark[B].
BAND BRAKE ASS`Y
LEVER TENTION ASS`Y

SPRING TENTION LEVER
Fig. 5-23 Lever Pinch Drive,

Lever Tension Drive Removal
STOPPER
"A"
MARK[B]
Fig. 5-24 Lever Tension Assy,

Band Brake Assy Removal
5-12
Samsung Electronics
5-4-13 Lever Brake S, T Assy Removal
5-4-14 Gear Idle Assy Removal
1) Release the Hook [A] and the Hook [B], [C] in the
direction of arrow as shown in Fig 5-25.
2) Lift the Lever S, T Brake Ass'y , with spring
brake .
1) Push the Lever Idle in the direction of arrow

A, B.
2) Lift the Lever Idle .
Assembly :
1)Assembly the Lever S Brake Ass'y on the Main
Base.
2)Assembly the Lever T Brake Ass'y with spring
brake .
Assembly :
1) Apply oil in two Bosses of Lever Idle .
2) Assemble the Gear Idle with the Lever Idle .
Note : When replacing the Gear Idle , be sure to
add oil in the boss of Lever Idle .
"A"
Note : Take extreme care not to be folded and

transformed Spring Brake at removing or reinstalling.
LEVER IDLE
GEAR IDLE
"B"
GEAR IDLE
HOOK "C"
HOOK(A)
SPRING BRAKE
LEVER S BRAKE ASS`Y
HOOK(C)
HOOK(B)
LEVER T BRAKE ASS`Y
Fig. 5-26 Gear Idle Assy Removal
Fig. 5-25 Lever Brake S, T Assy Removal
Samsung Electronics
5-13
5-4-15 Disk S, T Reel Removal
5-4-16 Holder Clutch Assy Removal
1) Lift the Disk S, T Reel , .
1) Remove the Washer Slit .

2) Lift the Holder Clutch Assy .
DISK S REEL
DISK T REEL
Note : When you reinstall Holder Clutch Ass'y

1) Check the condition of spring as shown in detail A.
2) Don't push Holder Clutch Ass'y down with excessive force Just insert Holder Clutch Ass'y into post
center with dead force and Rotate it smoothly.
Be sure to confirm that spring is in the slit of Gear
Center Ass'y as shown in detail B.
WASHER SLIT
HOLDER CLUTCH ASS`Y
Fig. 5-27 Disk S, T Reel Removal
DETAIL A
<BAD>
SPRING
<GOOD>
DETAIL B
SPRING
<BAD>
<GOOD>
Fig. 5-28 Holder Clutch Assy Removal

5-14
Samsung Electronics
5-4-17 Lever Up Down Assy, Gear Center

Assy Removal
1) Remove the 2 hooks in the direction of arrow as
shown Fig. 5-28 and lift the Lever Up Down Assy .
2) Lift the Gear Center Assy .
Assembly :
1) Insert the Lever Up Down Ass'y in the rectangular holes on Main Base as shown in Fig 5-30.
2) Lift the Lever Up Down Ass'y about 35.
(Refer to Fig 5-30)
3) Insert Ring of the Gear Center Ass'y in the
Guide of the Lever Up Down Ass'y .
4) Insert the Gear Center Ass'y in the post on
Main Base.
5) Push down the Lever Up Down Ass'y for
locking of the Hook.
5-4-18 Guide Cassette Door Removal

1) Lift the Hook [A].
2) Rotate the Guide Cassette Door in the direction
of arrow.
Note : After reinstalling the Guide Cassette Door
sure the Hook [A].
GUIDE CASSETTE DOOR
HOOK [A]
Note :
1) Take care not to separate and sentence does not
mark sense.
2) Be sure to confirm that Ring of the Gear Center
Ass'y is in the Guide of the Lever Up Down
Ass'y after finishing assembly of Lever Up
Down Ass'y and Gear Center Ass'y .
LEVER UP DOWN ASS`Y
GEAR CENTER ASS`Y
Fig. 5-31 Guide Cassette Door Removal
Fig. 5-29 Lever Up Down Assy Removal

GEAR CENTER ASS'Y
GUIDE
LEVER UP DOWN ASS'Y
RING
GEAR
POST
HOOK
35
MAIN BASE
Fig. 5-30 Lever Up Down Assy Removal

Samsung Electronics
5-15
5-4-19 Lever Unit Pinch Assy, Plate Joint,

Spring Pinch Drive Removal
1) Lift the Unit Pinch Assy .
2) Remove the Plate Joint from Lever Pinch Drive.
3) Remove the Spring Pinch Drive .
Note :
1) Take extreme care not to touch the grease on the
Roller Pinch.
2) When reinstalling, be sure to apply grease on the
post pinch roller.
5-4-20 Lever #9 Guide Assy Removal

1) Remove the Spring #9 Guide .
2) Lift the Spring #9 Guide Assy in the direction
of arrow A.
Note :
1) Take extreme care not to get grease on the tape
Guide Post.
2) After reinstalling, check the bottom side of the Post
#9 Guide to the top side of Main Base.
"A"
LEVER UNIT PINCH ASS`Y
SPRING #9 GUIDE
LEVER #9 GUIDE ASS`Y
PLATE JOINT
"B"
SPRING PINCH DRIVE
Fig. 5-33 Lever #9 Guide Assy Removal
Fig. 5-32 Lever Unit Pinch Assy, Plate Joint,

Spring Pinch Drive Removal
5-16
Samsung Electronics
5-4-21 FE Head Removal
5-4-22 ACE Head Removal

2) Lift the FE Head .
1) Pull out the FPC from connector of ACE Head

Assy .
3) Lift the ACE Head Assy .
FE HEAD
SCREW
HEAD ACE ASS`Y
Fig. 5-34 FE Head Removal
Fig. 5-35 ACE Head Removal
Samsung Electronics
5-17
5-4-23 Slider S, T Assy Removal
5-4-24 Plate Ground Deck, Cylinder Assy Removal
1) Move the Slider S, T Assy , to slot, and then

lift it to remove. (Refer to arrow)
1) Remove the 3 Screws .

2) Lift the Plate Ground Deck .
3) Lift the Cylinder Assy .
SLIDER S ASS`Y
SLIDER T ASS`Y
Assembly :
1) Match the 3 holes in the bottom of Cylinder ass'y
to the 3 holes of Main Base as attending not to
drop or knock the Cylinder ass'y .
2) Tighten the 1 Screw .
3) Match the Plate Ground Deck to the Hole of
Base Main.
4) Tighten the other 2 Screws .
Note :
1) Take care not to touch the Cylinder Ass'y and
the tape guide post at reinstalling.
2) When reinstalling, Don't push down too much on
Screw Driver.
3 SCREWS
Fig. 5-36 Slider S, T Assy Removal
PLATE GROUND DECK
CYLINDER ASS'Y
Fig. 5-37 Plate Ground Deck, Cylinder Assy Removal
5-18
Samsung Electronics
5-4-25 Belt Pulley Removal
5-4-26 Damper Capstan, Motor Capstan Assy

Removal
1) Remove the Belt Pulley .

Note : Take extreme care not to get grease on Belt
Pulley at assembling or reassembling.
BELT PULLEY
1) Remove the Damper Capstan in the direction

of arrow.
3) Remove the Motor Capstan Assy .
Assembly :
1) Match the 3 holes of Motor Capstan Assy to the
3 holes of Main Base. Be careful not to drop or
knock the Motor Capstan Ass'y .
2) Tighten the 3 Screws in the direction of arrow
as shown detail drawing.
3) Assemble the Damper Capstan .
Note : After tightening screws, check if there is gap
between the head of screws and the top side of Main
Base. There should have no gap between the head of
screws and the top side of Main Base.
After reinstalling, adjusting the tape transport
system again.
Fig. 5-38 Belt Pulley Removal
3 SCREWS
MOTOR CAPSTAN ASS'Y
Fig. 5-39 Damper Capstan,Motor Capstan Assy Removal
Samsung Electronics
5-19
5-4-27 Post #8 Guide Assy Removal

1) Rotate the Post #8 Guide Assy in the direction
of arrow to lift up.
5-4-29 How to Eject the Cassette Tape

(If the unit does not operate on condition that is
inserted into housing assy)
1) Turn the Gear worm clockwise with screw
driver.(Refer to arrow)
(Other method : Remove the Screw of Motor Load
Ass'y, Separate the Motor Load Ass'y)
POST #8 GUIDE ASS'Y
GEAR WORM
Fig. 5-40 Post #8 Guide Assy Removal

Fig. 5-42
5-4-28 Level Head Cleaner Assy Removal

(Optional)
1) Release the Hook .
2) Lift the Lever Head Cleaner Assy .
LEVER HEAD CLEANER ASS'Y
HOOK
2) When Slider S,T are approched in the position of

unloading, rotate holder Clutch counterclockwise
after inserting screw driver in the hole of frame's
bottom in order to wind the unwinded tape.
(Refer to Fig.5-43)
(If you rotate Gear Worm continuously when
tape is in state of unwinding, you may cause a
tape contamination by grease and tape damage.
Be sure to wind the unwinded tape in the state of
set horizently.)
3) Rotate Gear Worm clockwise using screw driver
again up to the state of eject mode and then pick
out the tape.(Refer to Fig.5-42)
SLEEVE-HEAD CLEANER
FRAME
Fig. 5-41 Lever Head Cleaner Assy Removal

Fig. 5-43
5-20
Samsung Electronics
5-5 The table of cleaning, Lubrication and replacement time about principal parts
1) The replacement time of parts is not life of parts.
2) The table 5-1 is that the VCR Set is in normal condition (normal temperature, normal humidity).
The checking period may be changed owing to the condition of use, runtime and environmental conditions.
3) Life of the Cylinder Assy is depend on the condition of use.
4) See exploded view for location of each parts.
<Table 5-1>
*
T
A
PE
P
A
T
H
S
Y
S
T
E
M
D
R
I
V
I
N
G
S
Y
S
T
E
M
B
R
A
K
E
S
Y
S
T
E
M
Parts Name
POST TENSION
SLANT POST S, T
#8 GUIDE SHAFT
CAPSTAN SHAFT
#9 GUIDE POST
#3 GUIDE POST
GUIDE ROLLER S, T
CYLINDER ASSY
FE HEAD
ACE HEAD
PINCH ROLLER
POST REEL S, T
SLEEVE TENSION
POST CENTER
LEVER IDLE BOSS (2Point)
CAPSTAN MOTOR PULLEY
BELT PULLEY
HOLDER CLUTCH ASSY
GEAR CENTER ASSY
GEAR IDLE (2Point)
LOADING MOTOR
BAND BRAKE ASSY
BRAKE T ASSY
Checking Period
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
: Cleaning
Samsung Electronics
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O : Check and replacement in necessary
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
- To clean the parts, use patch and

alcohol (solvent).
- After cleaning, use the video tape
after alcohol is gone away completely.
- We recommend to use oil [EP-50]
or solvent.
- One or two drops of oil should be
applied after
cleaning with alcohol.
- Periodic time of applying oil (Apply
oil after cleaning)
- The excessive applying oil may be
the cause of
malfunction.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Remark
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
: Add Oil
5-21
5-6 DVD Deck

5-6-1 Tray Disc Removal
1) Insert a Screw Driver into Emergency Hole and push the Slider Housing in the direction arrow A.
2) When the Tray Disc comes out a little, pull it in the direction arrow B by hand.
3) Pull the Tray Disc to disassemble , while simultaneously pushing 2 Stoppers (left, right) in the direction
arrow C, D.
STOPPER
SLIDER HOUSING
"C"
TRAY DISC
"B"
"A"
"D"
SCREW DRIVER
EMERGENCY HOLE
STOPPER
Fig. 5-44 Tray Disc Removal
5-22
Samsung Electronics
5-6-2 Assy P/U Deck Removal

1) Disconnect DCN2 , DCN3 .
2) Lift down the Assy P/U Deck while simultaneously pushing 2 Hooks , in the direction of arrow
A, B.
HOOK
"A"
"B"
HOOK
<Assembly Point>
SLIDER HOUSING
DCN2
ASSY- P/U DECK
DCN3
Fig. 5-45 Assy P/U Deck Removal
Samsung Electronics
5-23
5-6-3 Housing Assy Removal

1) Remove Belt .
2) Push the Hook in the direction arrow A and lift up Pulley Gear .
3) Push the Slider Housing in the direction arrow B and lift up the Gear Tray .
4) Lift up the Slider Housing .
5) Remove 2 Screws and lift down the Motor Load Assy .
6) Remove Clamper Assy .
HOOK
"A"
"B"
BELT
SLIDER HOUSING
GEAR TRAY
CLAMPER ASSY
PULLEY GEAR
MOTOR LOAD ASSY
2 SCREWS
Fig. 5-46 Housing Assy Removal
5-24
Samsung Electronics
5-6-4 Sub Chassis Removal

1) Remove the Soldering of Motor Feed (+, - wire) .
3) Lift up the Assy Brkt Deck .
4 SCREWS
ASSY-BRAK DECK
SOLDERING OF
MOTOR FEED (+, - WIRE)
Fig. 5-47 Sub Chassis Removal
Samsung Electronics
5-25
5-6-5 Assy Brkt Deck Removal

1) Push the Hook in the direction arrow A and lift up Gear Feed B .
2) Remove 3 Screws and 3 Holder Cam Skew .
3) Remove Shaft Pick-Up and Pick-Up Assy .
4) Remove Gear Feed A .
5) Remove 2 Screws .
6) Remove Motor Feed Assy .
7) Remove 3 Screws .
8) Remove Motor Spindle .
3 SCREWS
HOLDER CAM SKEW
PICK-UP ASS'Y
SHAFT PICK-UP
MOTOR SPINDLE
2 SCREWS
GEAR FEED B
GEAR FEED A
MOTOR FEED ASS'Y

3 SCREWS
HOOK
"A"
Fig. 5-48 Assy Brkt Deck Removal

5-26
Samsung Electronics
6. Alignment and Adjustments

6-1 VCR Adjustment
6-1-1 Reference
1) X-Point (Tracking center) adjustment, Head switching adjustment and NVRAM option setting can be adjusted with remote control.
2) When replacing the VCR Main PCB Micom (IC601) and NVRAM (IC605 ; EEPROM) be sure to adjust the Head switching adjustment
and NVRAM option setting.
3) When replacing the cylinder assy, be sure to adjust the X-Point and Head switching adjustment.
4) How to adjust.
- Short the TEST Point Function-Timer PCB to set the adjustment mode.
- If the corresponding adjustment button is pressed, the adjustment is performed automatically.
6-1-1(a) Location of adjustment button of remote control
X-Point (Tracking Center) Adjustment ;

NVRAM Option Setting ;
Head Switching Adjustment ;
Fig. 6-1
Samsung Electronics
6-1
Alignment and Adjustments
6-1-1(b) TEST location for adjustment mode setting
SHORT
Fig. 6-2 Function-Timer PCB (Top View)
6-2
Samsung Electronics
6-1-2 Head Switching Point Adjustment

1) Playback the alignment tape.
2) Short the TEST point Function-Timer PCB to set the adjustment mode. (See Fig. 6-2)
3) Press the 1, 0 button; remote control adjustment operates automatically. (See Fig. 6-1)
6-1-3 NVRAM Option Setting

1) NVRAM Option is adjusted in the factory.
2) In case VCR Main PCB Micom (IC601) and NVRAM (IC605 ; EEPROM) are replaced, be sure to set the corresponding option number of
the required model. (If the option is not set, the unit will not operate.)
2) Press the 1, 4 buttons on the remote control. The option setting appears. (See Fig. 6-3)
3) Select the option number (See table 6-1) of corresponding model with , , , buttons on the
remote control.
4) After selecting the option number is completed, press the button of remote control.
(If button is pressed, the selected number is changescolor. ; See Fig. 6-4)
5) Press the ENTER button of remote control again to store the option number.
6) Turn the Power off.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
MOVE :
SAVE :
Fig. 6-3
Samsung Electronics
ENTER
MOVE :
COMPLETE
Fig. 6-4
6-3
<Table 6-1 NVRAM Option Table>

MODELS
OPTION NUMBERS
DVD-CM500/XEF
2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 21, 23, 26, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 38, 40, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/XEU
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 23, 27, 29, 30, 32, 34, 38, 40, 41, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/XEG
2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/XET
2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/XEC
2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/SED
2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 21, 23, 26, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 38, 40, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/XEV
2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 21, 23, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37, 39, 42, 46, 47, 54, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70
DVD-CM500/XEL
2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/XEP
2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/XEE
2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/EUR
2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 23, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 36, 38, 42, 46, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/XEO
2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 23, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 36, 38, 42, 46, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/FES
2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 42, 46, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/AFR
2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 21, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 42, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70
DVD-CM500/XEH
2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 23, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 36, 38, 42, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/XEUI
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 23, 25, 26, 29, 30, 32, 34, 38, 40, 43, 47, 63, 65, 66, 69, 70, 72
DVD-CM500/XSA
1, 6, 7, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 23, 28, 29, 30, 32, 33, 34, 39, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
DVD-CM500/RAD
1, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 39, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-2020/HACO
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/XSG
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/TAW
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/UMG
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/ELT
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/SAM
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/XST
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 37, 38, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/XSS
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 37, 38, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/SMR
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 37, 38, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/XSV
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 37, 38, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/XSH
1, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 25, 27, 29, 30, 32, 35, 37, 38, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/XTL
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 37, 39, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/BPT
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22, 23, 29, 30, 32, 34, 36, 37, 38, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
CHT-500/XFA
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 17, 18, 20, 23, 25, 27, 29, 30, 32, 35, 38, 41, 42, 47, 57, 63, 65, 66, 70
6-4
Samsung Electronics
6-2 DVD Adjustment

6-2-1 Location of Test Point
Pin 29 of RIC1
Fig. 6-5 Location of test Point (DVD Main PCB - Top Side)
Samsung Electronics
6-5
6-2-2 Skew Adjustment

6-2-2(a) Adjustment Spec. and Test Point
Test Disc ; Service not Available
<Table 6-2>
Test Disc
Adjustment Spec.
Test Point
Adjustment Location
TDV-533
Chapter 14
Flat Waveform
Pin 29 of RIC1
(DVD Main PCB - Top Side)
(See Fig. 6-5)
Assy Deck -Top Side

(See Fig. 6-6)
SKEW (Tangential) : The shift on the Vertical axis of Spindle Motor movement.
SKEW (Radial) : The shift on the Direction of the Spindle Motor movement.
Fig. 6-6 Assy Deck (Top Side)

6-6
Samsung Electronics
6-2-2(b) SKEW Adjustment Method

Needed to minimize the variations in Skew of the Pick-up unit and to provide optimum match with the recorded
signal on the Disc.
1) Remove the Assy Deck.
Place the Assy Deck on a flat horizontal position.
2) Connect an Oscilloscope to the Pin 29 of RIC1 Test Point. (See Fig. 6-5)
Set the Oscilloscope Range as follows :
(Voltage ; 50mV/Div., Frequency ; 10m Sec.)
3) Connect Power, Open the Tray and Play Ch.14 which is in the TDV-533 Disc.
4) Adjust the Screws A and B (See Fig. 6-6) using a Hex screwdriver until you obtain a Flat Waveform and
the picture is stable.
Then, go to Chapter 1 and make sure the Waveform is Flat here as well.
If not, you have to go back to Chapter 14 and adjust again.
If you cannot obtain a Flat waveform, then the unit is defective.
Note : The Deck must be in a horizontal position. Use both A and B screws to adjust, but mostly A.
Typical Waveform before Adjustment
Waveform after Correct Adjustment
Fig. 6-7 Envelope Waveform
Samsung Electronics
6-7
6-3 VCR Mechanical Adjustment

6-3-1 Tape Transport System and Adjustment Locations
The tape transport system has been adjusted precisely in the factory. Alignment is not necessary except for the
following :
1) Noise observed on the screen.
2) Tape damage.
3) Parts replacement in the tape transport system.
Lower flange height of tape guide is used as the reference for the transport adjustment.
To maintain the height of the tape guide and prevent damage, do not apply excessive force onto the main base.
CYLINDER ASS'Y
GUIDE ROLLER "S"
GUIDE ROLLER "T"
FULL ERASE HEAD
HEIGHT SCREW
#3 GUIDE POST
TENSION POST
PINCH ROLLER
TILT SCREW
X - POSITION
ADJUST SILT
#9 GUIDE POST
AZIMUTH SCREW
CAPSTAN
#8 GUIDE POST
TAKE UP REEL DISK
SUPPLY REEL DISK
Fig. 6-8 Location of Tape Transport Adjustment

PINCH ROLLER
FE HEAD
CYLINDER ASS'Y
GUIDE ROLLER "S"
GUIDE ROLLER "T"
POST TENSION
#8 GUIDE POST #9 GUIDE POST
#3 GUIDE POST
MAIN BASE
ACE HEAD
CAPSTAN SHAFT
Fig. 6-9 Tape Travel Diagram
6-8
Samsung Electronics
6-3-2 Tape Transport System Adjustment

When parts are replaced, perform the required adjustments by referring to procedures for the tape transport
system. If there are any changes to the tape path, first run a T-120 tape and make sure excessive tape wrinkle does
not occur at the tape guides.
If tape wrinkle is observed at the guide roller S, T, turn the guide roller S, T until wrinkle disappears.
If the tape wrinkle is still observed at the tape guide, perform the tilt adjustment of the ACE head.
(1) ACE Head Assembly Adjustment
a. ACE HEAD HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
1) Run the alignment tape (Color bar) in the playback mode.
2) Observe surface of the audio head using a dental mirror.
3) Turn screw (C) clockwise or counterclockwise until the gap of lower tape edge and the lower edge of the
control head is about 0.25mm. (Refer to Fig. 6-10 and 6-11)
SCREW (A)
TLIT ADJUST
SCREW (C)
HEIGHT ADJUST
X-POSITION
ADJUSTING SLIT
SCREW (D)
X-POSITION LOCKING
SCREW (B)
AZIMUTH ADJUST
Fig. 6-10 Location of ACE Head Adjustment Screw

AUDIO HEAD
VIDEO HEAD
0 ~ 0 .25 mm
CONTROL HEAD
Fig. 6-11 ACE Head Height Adjustment
Samsung Electronics
6-9
b. ACE HEAD TILT ADJUSTMENT

1) Playback a blank tape and observe the position of the tape at the lower flange of tape guide.
2) Confirm that there is no curl or wrinkle at the lower flange of tape guide as shown in Fig. 6-12 (B).
3) If a curl or wrinkle of the tape occurs, slightly turn the screw (A) tilt adjust on the ACE head assy.
4) Reconfirm the ACE head height.
(A)
(B)
(BAD)
(GOOD)
WRINKLE
Fig. 6-12 Tape Guide Check

c. AUDIO AZIMUTH ADJUSTMENT
1) Load alignment tape (Mono scope) and playback the 7KHz signal.
2) Connect channel-1 scope probe to audio output.
3) Adjust screw (B) to achieve maximum audio level. (See Fig. 6-10)
6-10
Samsung Electronics
d. ACE HEAD POSITION (X-POINT) ADJUSTMENT

1) Playback the alignment tape (Color bar).
3) Press the 0, 5 remote control buttons, then adjustment is operates automatically. (See Fig. 6-1)
4) Connect the CH-1 probe to Envelope the CH-2 probe to HD switching pulse and then trigger to CH-1.
5) Insert the (-) driver into the X-Point adjustment hole and adjust it so that envelope waveform is maximum.
Test point :
TP2 (Audio Output)

TP3 (Envelope)
TP4 (HD S/W -Trigger)
TP5 (Control Pulse)
CONTROL PULSE
HEAD SWITCHING
ENVELOPE
AUDIO OUTPUT
Fig. 6-13 Location of Test point (VCR Main PCB-Top View)
Samsung Electronics
6-11
(2) Linearity adjustment (Guide roller S, T adjustment)

1) Playback the Mono Scope alignment tape (SP mode).
2) Observe the video envelope signal on an oscilloscope (triggered by the video switching pulse).
3) Make sure the video envelope waveform (at its minimum) meets the specification shown in Fig. 6-14.
If it does not, adjust as follows :
Note :
a=Maximum output of the video RF envelope.
b=Minimum output of the video RF envelope at the entrance side.
c=Minimum output of the video RF envelope at the center point.
d=Maximum output of the video RF envelope at the exit side.
4) If the section A in Fig. 6-15 does not meet the specification, adjust the guide roller S up or down.
5) If the section B in Fig. 6-15 does not meet the specification, adjust the guide roller T up or down.
abcd
63%
c,b,d/a
Fig. 6-14 Envelope Waveform Adjustment
H'D SWITCHING PULSE
ENVELOPE
Fig. 6-15 Adjustment Points
6-12
Samsung Electronics
6) Play back the Mono Scope alignment tape (SP mode).

7) Connect an oscilloscope CH-1 to the Envelope and CH-2 to the HD SW Pulse for triggering.
8) Turn the guide roller heads with a flat head (
) driver to obtain a flat video RF envelope as shown in Fig. 6-16.
IDEAL ENVELOPE
S HEIGHT TOO HIGH
S HEIGHT TOO LOW
T HEIGHT TOO HIGH
GUIDE ROLLER S
T HEIGHT TOO LOW
GUIDE ROLLER T
Fig. 6-16 Guide Roller S, T Height Adjustment
Samsung Electronics
6-13
(3) Check Transitional Operation from RPS to Play

Check transition from RPS mode to play mode : Using a pre-recorded SP tape, make sure the entry side of envelope comes to an appropriate steady state within 3 seconds (as shown in Fig. 6-17).
If the envelope waveform does not reach specified peak-to peak amplitude within 3 seconds, adjust as follows :
1) Make sure there is no gap between the supply roller lower flange and the tape.
If there is a gap, adjust the supply guide roller again.
2) Change operation mode from the RPS to the play mode (again) and make sure the entry side of envelope rises
within 3 seconds.
ENTRANCE SIDE ENVELOPE
Fig. 6-17 Video Envelope Rising when Operation mode Changes from RPS to Play Mode
(4) Envelope Check

1) Make recordings on T-120 (E-120) and T-160 (E-180) tape.
Make sure the playback output envelope meets the specification as shown in Fig. 6-18.
2) Play back a self recorded tape (recording made on the unit using with T-120 (E-120).
The video envelope should meet the specification as shown in Fig. 6-18.
In SP mode, (A) should equal (B).
If the head gap is wide, upper cylinder should be checked.
Fig. 6-18 Envelope Input and Output Level
(5) Tape Wrinkle Check

1) Run the T-160 (E-180) tape in the playback, FPS, RPS and Pause modes and observe tape wrinkle at
each guide.
2) If excessive tape wrinkle is observed, perform the following adjustments in Playback mode :
Tape wrinkle at the guide roller S, T section : Linearity adjustment.
Tape wrinkle at tape guide flange : ACE head assembly coarse adjustment.
6-14
Samsung Electronics
6-3-3 Reel Torque

1) The rotation of the capstan motor causes the holder clutch assy to rotate through the belt pulley.
2) The spring wrap PLAY/REV of holder clutch assy drives the disk reel S, T through gear idler by rotation of
gear center assy.
3) Brake is operated by slider cam at FF/REW mode.
4) Transportation of accurate driving force is done by gears. (Gear Center Assy)
Note : If the spec. does not meet the followings specifications, replace the holder clutch assy and then recheck.
<Table 6-3>
MODE
TORQUE g/cm
GAUGE
PB
42 11
Cassette Torquemeter
RPS
145 30
Cassette Torquemeter
Samsung Electronics
6-15
MEMO
6-16
Samsung Electronics
7. Circuit Operating Descriptions

7-1 S.M.P.S.
(1) Comparsion between Linear Power Supply and S.M.P.S.
(a) Linear
Vreg
Vout
REGULATOR
+
Common power
(Ex.100~240V 50/60Hz)
Vp
(Np)
+
Vs
(Ns)
Fig. 7-1 Linear Power Supply

Waveform/Description
Vs
Input : Common power to transformer (Vp).
Fig. 7-2
Vs
The output Vs of transformer is determined by the ratio

of 1st Np and 2nd Ns.
Vs = (Ns/Np) x Vp
Fig. 7-3
Vout
Vout is output (DC) by diode and condensor.
Fig. 7-4
Samsung Electronics
7-1
Circuit Operating Descriptions
Advantages and disadvantages of linear power supply
Change by common power
1) Advantages : Little noise because the output waveform

of transformer is sine wave.
2) Disadvantages :
Additional margin is required because Vs is changed (depending on power source). (The regulator
loss is caused by margin design).
Greater core size and condensor capacity are needed, because the transformer works on a single
power frequency.
v
Vout
Vreg
t
Regulator loss
Fig. 7-5
(b) S.M.P.S. (Switch Mode Power Supply)

Vout
Transformer
(Np)
(Ns)
+
+
(Vp)
(Vs)
REGULATOR
+
+
Vin
Switch
ON/OFF Control
+
Vs switch
I switch
Fig. 7-6
Terms
1) 1st : Common power input to 1st winding.
2) 2nd : Circuit followings output winding of transformer.
3) f (Frequency) : Switching frequency (T : Switching cycle)
4) Duty : (Ton/T) x 100
7-2
Samsung Electronics
(2) Circuit description (FLY-Back PWM (Pulse Width Modulation control)

(a) AC Power Rectification/Smoothing Terminal
1) D01, D02, D03, D04 : Convert AC power to DC (Full wave rectification)
2) C10 : Smooth the voltage converted to DC.
3) C03, C04, C05 : Remove input/output noise from power supply.
4) R01 : THERMISTOR for protection against lightning.
(b) SNUBBER Circuit
Vswitch
Inverted power
by leakage
inductance
dt
t
Toff
- Amp End ; R10, D10, C11, C12

- Combo End ; R1SD11, R1SD13, D1SS11, C1SD12, C1SD16
1) Prevents high voltage from being induced at both
ends of the Switch when turning OFF the Swtich
OFF/Suppresses noise occurrence.
Since the trans primary winding is a coil, high reverse
power is generated when the current is cut off.
(V=-L1 x (di/dt))
(L1 : LEAKAGE INDUCTION)
Since this is a very short interval in the actual circuit,
very high voltage is induced at both ends of PIC1.
Fig. 7-7
2) SNUBBER circuit prevents damage to (AMP end ; R10, IC01, IC03), (COMBO end ; Q1SD11, IC1SS2, IC1SS1)
and IC02 through suppression of LEAKAGE voltage by R, C.
- Amp end ; Charges LEAKAGE voltage with D10, C11 and discharges with R10.
- Combo end ; Charges Leakage voltage with D1SS11, C1SD12 and discharges with R1SD11, R1SD13.
3) For Noise Reduction
- AMP end ; C12
- Combo end ; C1SD16
(c) Vcc circuit
(AMP end)
1) R11, R12, R13 : Starting resistance of IC01 and Q10 (IC01 operates via starting resistance when power cord is
inserted)
2) PIC1 Vcc : D12, R16, C15
Since electric current flows through the trans once the IC01 and Q10 are started, use the output of the trans as
Vcc.
Rectified at D12, Smoothed at C15
Why trans output is used as IC01 Vcc: The load is different before and after the start of IC01.
(After the start, the load increases. So when only the starting resistance is used, IC01s Vcc drops DOWN
below the OFF voltage and cannot be operated.)
(COMBO end)
1) R1SRF01, R1SRF02, R1SRF03 : Starting resistance of IC1SS2 and Q1SD11
(IC1SS2 operates via starting resistance when power cord is inserted)
2) IC1SS2 Vcc : D1SF02, R1SS08, C1SF03
Since electric current flows through the trans once the IC1SS2 and Q1SD11 are started, use the output of the
trans as Vcc.
Rectified at D1SF02, Smoothed at C1SF03
Samsung Electronics
7-3
DIGITAL
AMP
26.5V Rectified
Smoothing Circuit
Noise
Removal
(SNUBBER)
Converter
Power
Control Circuit
O
U
T
P
U
T
Voltage
Detection
Circuit
FLT Driving Circuit
Smoothing
Circuit
3.3V Rectified
Smoothing Circuit
Noise
Removal
(SNUBBER)
5.8V Rectified
Smoothing Circuit
Rectified Circuit
Converter
38V Rectified
Smoothing Circuit
Line Filter
V
C
R
/
D
V
D
O
U
T
P
U
T
15V Rectified
Smoothing Circuit
Power IN
(110V)
Power
Control Circuit
Voltage
Detection
Circuit
Fig. 7-8
7-4
Samsung Electronics
(d) Feedback Control Circuit

(Amp End)
Fig. 7-9
- Output Duty decision jack: IC01 VCC jack
- IC03s C-E and IC01s VCC jack have the same electric potential.
Description of Operation
1) Reference potential of IC02s internal OP-AMP + is 2.5V, and external - input electric potential is connected
to R34, R35 to keep the Vout at 28V.
2) If Vout falls below 28V because the LOAD of 28V end is increased (or AC input voltage is decreased):
IC02s P electric potential falls below 2.5V --> IC02 A-Ks BASE current decreases --> IC02s A-K current
decreases --> IC03s DIODE current decreases --> IC03s C-E current decreases --> IC03 C-E voltage increases
--> IC01s Vcc voltage increases --> Output Duty increases --> Trans primary current increases -->
Trans primary POWER increases --> Vout increases --> Vout 28V maintained.
Samsung Electronics
7-5
(Combo End)
Fig. 7-10
- Output Duty decision jack: IC1SS2 - FB jack
- IC1SS1s C-E and IC1SS2s FB jack have the same electric potential.
Description of Operation
1) Reference potential of IC1SS1s internal OP-AMP + is 2.5V and external - input electric potential is
connected to R1SS04, R1SS05 to keep the Vout at 5.8V.
2) If Vout falls below 5.8V because the LOAD of 5.8V end is increased (or AC input voltage is decreased):
IC1SS2s P electric potential falls below 2.5V --> IC1SS2 A-Ks BASE current decreases --> IC1SS2s A-K
current increases --> IC1SS1s DIODE current decreases --> IC1SS1s C-E current decreases --> IC1SS1 voltage
increases --> IC1SS2s FB voltage increases --> Output Duty increases --> Trans primary current increase -->
Trans primary POWER increases --> Vout increases --> Vout 5.8V maintained.
7-6
Samsung Electronics
7-2 VCR System Control

REMOCON
LED
DISPLAY
SYSCON
MECHA BLOCK
MICOM
SERVO
OSD
IIC COMMON
MTS/Hi-Fi IC
EPROM IC
SERVO
BLOCK
I/O IC801
TM BLOCK
NSP6241
DVD PCB
ZR36768
Fig. 7-11 Micom Block Diagram
(1) Outline
The system control circuit inputs the commands given by the operator to set the mechanism and circuit to the
commanded mode. The circuit also inputs the detected output from the tape and mechanism protection sensor
and protects the VCR and tape against abnormal operation.
Fig. 7-11 is a simplified system control block diagram.
The system control is performed by 4 control sections. (System and timer control, Servo control, F/S Tuner, On
Screen Display).
Samsung Electronics
7-7
Fig. 7-12 IC601 Block Diagram
7-8
Samsung Electronics
(2) Mechanism/Circuit Control

When the u-COM inputs operators commands via the key input or remote input, the mechanism and circuits are
set to the command mode. This function controls mechanism/servo section and audio/video processing section.
1) Cassette Loading Control
Controls loading and ejection of a cassette and determines the mechanism operation mode; tape loading/
unloading, action/release of various breaks, tension, take up mechanism etc.
2) Tape Protection Sensor Monitoring
Detects abnormal operation in tape using the supply and take up end sensor, reel sensor and SW 30Hz pulse
for drum rotation.
3) Capstan Motor Control
Determines the tape speed and direction, fast forwards and rewinds the tape etc.
4) Tape Counter Control
Counts the control pulses on the control track, picked up by the control head and shows it on the digital
multidisplay.
5) Servo Control
Determines the operation mode of the servo circuit. Control the speed of drum and capstan motor, and then
Control the phase of drum and capstan motor.
6) Record Safety Tap Detection
Detects the safety tab on the rear of a cassette to prevent a prerecorded program from being erased.
7) Loading/Unloading control
Controls a series of loading/unloading operation after the u-COM judges the operation mode and sets the
mechanism to suitable mode. Fig. 7-13 show correlation between u-COM and peripheral components during
the loading/unloading operation.
The mechanism state switch (PROG. SW) detects the mechanism position. When the driving gear is turned by
the loading motor, the switch driving slider traces the groove, and this switch stops at the correct position
corresponding to each mode. In other words, the u-COM judges the present mechanism state from the PROG
SW after receiving the mode data, then it outputs the loading motor and capstan motor control signals.
This continues until the PROG SW reaches the correct state by the u-COM.
FUNCTION-TIMER
<u-COM>
SYSTEM
CONTROL/
OSD
OPERATION
MODE
DISPLAY
AND
KEY
MATRIX
MECHANISM STATE
INFORMATION
PROG
SW
SERVO BLOCK
DFG,DFG
CFG
CAPSTAN / DRUM
MOTOR
CAPSTAN
MOTOR ASSY
(3 in 1)
LOADING
MOTOR
LOADING
GEAR
Fig. 7-13 The Relationship Between u-COM, Capstan, Cylinder and Loading Motor
Samsung Electronics
7-9
(3) Program SW Input

The mechanism state for each mode is shown in table 1 below. The mechanism state is classified into position, and
correlation between the switch position and mechanism state is shown in table 1, also.
Table 1 : Prog. SW State in Each Mode
POSION
STANBY
POWER OFF
LOADING START
LOADING END
REV
PLAY
STOP 1
STOP 2
FF/REW 1
FF/REW 2
A
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
CAM S/W
B
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
C
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
START
SEN
0
1
1
1
X
X
1
X
X
X
ACTION MODE
Eject
Unload POWER OFF
(Tape loading start point)
(Tape loading end point)
Reverse picture search, reverse SLOW
Play, Rec, F-PS, Still, SLOW, F-ADV
Stop (Play position 5 Min. over)
(MAIN Break ON MODE)
High speed Rew, Low speed FF
High speed FF, Low speed Rew
(4) Motor Control

In case of Scorpio-2 Deck, Loading Motor Drive IC lies in Capstan Motor, not like Scorpio-1 Deck.
In detail, Capstan Motor Drive IC is designed to drive Loading Motor + Capstan Motor + Cylinder Motor in one
IC. (See Fig. 7-14)
Table 2 : Motor Control Logic
CN604-PIN10
0 ~ 1V
2 ~ 3V
4 ~ 5V
7-10
MOTOR
Reverse
Stop
Forward
Samsung Electronics
R3
Samsung Electronics
C13
R4
C2
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
C17
C16
LD-VCO
LD-LI
D-UOUT
D-VOUT
D-WOUT
D-RS
D-MCOM
D-VCO
D-M/T GND
D-PGO1
D-PGIN+
D-PGIN-
GND
HU+
HUF/R
VCO (B+)
RFS
RFP
M/T-GND
W-OUT
V-OUT
U-OUT
LD-L2
LD-GND
C15
LB11884 (48-SS0P)
R6
R5
C1
LD-VREG
V-CTL
D-BFG
D-PGO2
D-CTL
LD-IN
D-C1
D-C2
D-F.C
D-CX
D-VCOIN
D-PCOUT
GND
HVHV+
HWHW+
CFG(D)
Vcc(5V)
CFG(A)
CFG(IN)
I-LIM
F.C
PWM
S-GND
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
C14
C9
C11
C3
C4
HU
C6
C7
C5
C12
C10
HV
R8
M.R(360PPR)
HW
R2
D PG-FG OUT
11
CN2
LD OUT-1
N.C
LD OUT-2
10
11
D V-OUT
D W-OUT
N.C
D M/T-COM
D U-OUT
D M/T-GND
D PG-
D PG+
FUNCTION
1
PIN#
D-VCTL
L L-IN
12
C-VCTL
9
10
D/L Vco2(B+)
C S-GND
7
8
C M/T-GND
6
C I-LIM
C F/R
4
5
C Vcc(5V)
C Vco1(B+)
C FGOUT
FUNCTION
PIN#
CN1
Fig. 7-14 Loading Motor + Capstan Motor + Cylinder Motor Block Diagram
7-11
(5) Stop Mode

The VCR enters the stop mode when the stop button is pressed during playback, record, rewind and fast forward
mode. When trouble is detected, the VCR enters the stop mode to protect the tape and mechanism or when the
tape reaches the end, etc.
State Input ;
Power switch on position.
Stop button operation in all mode, except for timer recording and XPR.
(6) Loading/Unloading Operation

Mechanism operation in loading/unloading is as described previously.
Signal Processing ;
Audio, video record/play ;
Micom Controls the AV1 chip by IIC line.
(7) Play Mode

State input ; Play button operated in stop, fast forward, rewind, forward search, reverse search, still mode, etc.,
Indication output ;
PLAY lights in LED Display.
Output at ;
IC601 Pin 25 (CAP F/R) : H
(8) Trick Play Mode

Trick play modes are classified into forward search, reverse search, still, slow and frame advance.
Audio signal is muted by pin 35 of IC601 (A.MUTE). V-lock is controlled by pin 31 of IC601.
(9) Forward Search Mode

7 Times play speed search in SP and SLP, 21 times play speed search in SLP.
State input ; Press the fast forward button on the VCR front panel or the remote control in play or still mode.
Indication output ; FPS display in LED during 3 seconds.
Output at ;
IC601 Pin 35 (A.MUTE) : H
(10) Reverse Search Mode

7 times play speed reverse search in SP, 21 times play speed reverse search in SLP.
State input ;
Press the rewind button on the VCR front panel or on the remote control in play or still mode.
Indication output ;
RPS display in LED during 3 seconds.
Output ;
IC601 Pin 25 (CAP F/R)
:H
IC601 Pin 35 (A.MUTE)
:H
IC601 Pin 31 (V-LOCK)
: PULSE
IC601 Pin 30 (HD AMP S/W)
: PULSE
(11) Slow Mode

State input ; Press button and then press button on the remote control.
The slow speed can be changed when or button is pressed.
Indication output ; SLOW lights in LED display.
Output at ;
:H
:H
IC601 Pin 31 (V-LOCK)
: PULSE
IC601 Pin 30 (HD AMP S/W)
: PULSE
7-12
Samsung Electronics
(12) Play/Still Mode

The same track is traced by the video heads.
State input ; Press button in play modes.
Indication output ; STILL display in LED display.
Output at ;
:H
:H
(13) Record Mode

Must use a cassette with the safety tab.
Index signal is recorded on the control track of the tape at the start of recording.
State input ;
Press the record button during stop mode and record pause mode or at the preset time reached in the timer
record mode. Press the REC button in stop mode.
Indication output ;
REC lights in LED display in normal record mode, OTR display in timer XPR modes.
Output at ;
:H
(14) Record Pause Mode

The pinch roller is released from the capstan shaft in a moment.
The brake is applied to the take up reel to prevent tape slack during the record pause mode.
State input ; Press button in the record mode.
Note : Inoperative during recording and XPR mode.
Indication output ; PAUSEdisplay in LED display.
(15) Fast Forward Mode

Tape fast forward operation using capstan motor.
State input ; Press the rewind button in the stop or fast forward modes.
Indication output ; FF lights in LED display.
Output at ;
(16) Rewind Mode

Tape rewind operation using the capstan motor.
State input ; Press the rewind button in the stop or fast forward modes.
Indication output ; REW lights in LED display.
Output at ;
IC601 Pin 25 (CAP F/R) : L
(17) Rewind Shut-Off Mode

Tape rewind operation then power off mode.
State input ; Press the power button in the rewind mode.
Samsung Electronics
7-13
(18) VISS (VHS Index Search System)

Index search ;
Find a certain point of the tape using high speed REW/FF and start playback. (Fig. 3-41).
The detection is obtained by adjusting the width of the control pulse. (duty cycle)
When recording starts, the duty cycle of control pulse will change and then record on the control track of the
tape for 2 seconds.
100%
60
100%
5%
REC CTL
27.5
2.5%
PB CTL
(NORMAL RECORD)
(INDEX RECORD)
Fig. 7-15 Index Recording
Index Detection Process

The detector block in IC601 detects the duty cycle of the control pulse input at Pin 54. When detecting the index
mark, the Micom controls the next operation such as scan play.
7-14
Samsung Electronics
(19) Trouble Detection

The trouble detection circuits are provided to protect the from damage (Fig. 7-16). The reel lock sensor detects
incorrect rotation of supply and take up reel. The reel lock sensor consists of the disk and photo sensor installed at
the bottom of the reel disk. the disk has 6 or 8 shielder parts and the photo sensor consists of the LED and photo
transistor assembly. When the light is shielded by the the shielder or enters the photo transistor, the output is
obtained from the photo sensor. IC601 measures the period of the pulse. When it is 4 seconds or more during
record/play, the VCR enters the reel emergency mode.
The VCR maintains the unload-power-on state in the reel emergency.
R607
R606
R605
65
75
74
C602
R604
R603
98
99
R601
R602
Fig. 7-16 Reel and Cylinder Lock T.END/S.END Sensor
(20) Cylinder Lock Sensor

If the frequency of D-FG is less than 230Hz or more than 430Hz during 500msec, and such stuation occurs 3 times
contined, micom makes the VCR drum emergency.
(21) Tape End Sensor

When end sensor detects the transparent section at the end of tape, the VCR enters auto rewind mode, except
during timer recording and OTR mode. The cassette LED emits light through the transparent section of tape to
the photo transistors, which are installed at both ends of the cassette. When start sensor detects the start section
of the tape during reverse search and rewind, the VCR automatically goes to stop mode.
Samsung Electronics
7-15
(22) Tape Counter Control

Fig. 7-17 is a simplified diagram of the tape counter control circuit. The tape counter in the u-COM counts the
control pulses derived from control head. The control signal on the control track of the tape is picked up by the
control head and supplied to pins 85, 86 of IC601. The control pulse is amplified by the u-COM IC. The u-COM
determines the tape direction so the counter counts up when the CAP F/Rsignal is Hi and the counter counts
down when the CAP F/R signal is Low. By counting the control pulse, the counter data is supplied to the LED
display. Counter displays the time and it is increased or decreased by one minute after counting 1800 control pulses. Counter mode is switched to clock mode when the display button is pushed or when the VCR goes to power
off mode. When the reset button is pressed, the counter is reset to 00 : 00.
The tape counter has a memory stop function.
LED DISPLAY
LED DISPLAY Drive IC
(Miw - Pin 8~11)
74
75
Fig. 7-17 Counter Display
7-16
Samsung Electronics
(23) Timer/OTR Control

The timer can preset 16 programs in one year including daily and weekly programs.
Express recording lets the operator record up to 9 hours 30 minutes without programming the timer.
(24) Clock Display

The clock generator inside of the u-COM counts the oscillation signal of XT601 for the timer clock data.
(25) Power Failure Detection

u-COM goes to the power failure mode when the 61 port is lower than 4/5 of AD Vcc level.
(26) 4HD Control

During trick play (still,slow,F-advance), it is necessary to control pre-amp,video circuit. the micom control pin 29
(C-ROTARY), pin 30 (HD-AMP) of the IC601 during PB period in Slow mode.
These port is applied to video IC to operate the trick play.
Samsung Electronics
7-17
7-3 VCR Servo

(1) Outline
The servo system is divided into three loops. The cylinder servo controls the rotation of video heads, the capstan
servo controls the tape speed, and the tension. In addition its necessary to control cylinder motor, especially
during trick play in 4HD models. The tension servo maintains the tape tension constant: it keeps the compression
strength of tape against the video heads at the optimum level so that a stable RF signal is produced during
recording and playback. The tension servo operation is entirely mechanical. The cylinder servo loop controls the
phase and speed of the cylinder motor. The speed is kept at a constant 1800 RPM and the
phase determines the mechanical position relative to the vertical Sync signal. The capstan servo loop controls the
phase and speed of the capstan motor so that the video head can trace the video track correctly. It keeps tape
speed constant according to the mode (SP, SLP)during playback and recording.
Table 3 : Servo System Signal
MODE
REFERENCE
SIGNAL
REC
V-SYNC
PB
REF30Hz
SPEED
COMMON
14.318MHz
SPEED&
PHASE
TRICK PLAY
(STILL. SLOW)
MOTOR
SYSTEM
CYLINDER
PHASE
COMPARISON SIGNAL
SW 30Hz
(VIDEO
HEAD)
(4H' D)
MICOM CONTROL CYLINDER SPEED

TO MATCH H-SYNC SPEED
REC
DIVIDED CFG PULSE
PB
CTL 30Hz
SPEED
COMMON
14.318MHz
SPEED&
PHASE
TRICK PLAY
(STILL. SLOW)
PHASE
CAPSTAN
(4H' D)
7-18
CYLINDER FG(720Hz)
REF 30Hz
CAPSTAN FG
MICOM CONTROL CAPSTAN DRIVE

SIGNAL WITH CAP C.L
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
RECCTL
head
PBCTL
amplifier
Speed error
detection
Phase
detection
Phase error
detection
Speed error
detection
composite sync
signal
Vertical sync signal

VSYNC separation
circuit
RECCTL
generation
HSW
generation
Kp
(Drum phase gain)
Kp
CFG amplifier
Kv
(Capstan phase gain)
Digital
filter
Digital
filter
(Drum speed gain)
Digital
filter
Remark
Digital
filter
PWM
conversion
Carrier rejection filter
Carrier rejection filter
Motor
driver
The broken line indicates the internal processing of the MICOM
CFG signal
Bias value
addition
PWM
conversion
DFG signal
DFG amplifier
Kv
DPG signal
DPG comparator
Motor
driver
M
Drum
motor
Capstan
motor
Fig. 7-18 Block Diagram
7-19
(2) Capstain Speed Error Detector

The capstan speed control operates so as to hold the capstan at a constant rotational speed, by measuring the period of the CFG signal. A digital counter detects the speed deviation from a preset value. The speed error data is
added to phase error data in a digital filter. this filter controls a pulse-width modulate (PWM) output, which controls the rotational speed and phase the captain.
When the error is zero, the PWM circuit outputs a waveform with a 50% duty cycle.
The CFG input signal from the capstan motor is a square wave the CFG input signal is compared by a comparator
and than sent to speed error detector as the CFG signal.
The speed error detector uses the system clock to measure the period of the CFG signal, and detects the deviation
from a preset data value. The preset data is the value that would result from measuring the CFG signal period
with the clock signal if the capstan motor were running at the correct speed.
The error detector operates by latching a counter value when it detects an edge of the CFG signal.
the latched counter provides 16 bits of speed error data for the digital filter to operate on.
The digital filter adds the speed error data to phase error data from the capstan phase control system,then sends
the result to the pulse-width modulator as capstan error data.
(3) Capstain Phase Error Detector
The capstan phase error detector consists of a 16-bit counter, a capstan phase preset data register pair, a latch signal circuit driven by a feedback signal, and a captain phase error data register pair.
The capstan phase control in rec mode is executed by comparing HD S/W, which is synchronized with V-sync,
with devided CFG signal. And than it does in playback mode by comparing HD S/W, which is synchronized with
DFG and DPG, with PB CTL signal.
The latch signal for the phase error data in record mode is the devied CFG signal, which is devided from the CFG
signal in the CFG frequency devider to a frequency of 30HZ.
In playback, the latch signal is the devied CFG signal obtained by frequency division from the rising edge of PBCTL signal (playback control pulse signal).
The error data is a signed binary value centered on a phase error of zero (corresponding to the correct rotational
phase). If the phase legs the correct phase ,the error is positive (+).
If the phase leads the correct phase, the error is negative (-).
(4) Drum Speed Error Detector
Drum speed control operates so as to hold the drum at a constant rotational speed, by measuring the period of
the DFG signal. A digital counter detects the speed deviation from a preset value. The speed error data is added
to phase error data in a digital filter. The filter controls a pulsewidth modulated (PWM) output,which controls the
rotational speed and phase of the drum.
The DFG input signal from the drum motor is a square wave. The DFG input signal is compared by a comparator
and than sent to the speed error detector as the DFG signal.
The speed error detector uses the system clock to measure the period of the DFG signal, and detects the deviation
from a preset data value. The preset data is the value that would result from measuring the DFG signal period
with the clock signal if the drum motor were running at the correct speed.
The error detector operates by latching a counter value when it detects an edge of the DFG signal. The latched
count provides 16 bits of speed error data for the digital to operate on.
The digital filter adds the speed error data to phase error data from the drum phase control system, then sends
the result to the pulse-width modulator as drum error data.
7-20
Samsung Electronics
(5) Drum Phase Error Detector

Drum phase control must start operating after the drum motor is brought to the correct rotational speed by the
speed control system . Drum speed control works as follows in record and playback.
- Record : Phase is controlled so that the vertical blanking intervals of the recorded video
signal will line up along the edge of the tape.
- Playback : Phase is controlled so as to trace the recorded tracks accurately.
A digital counter detects the phase deviation from a preset value. The phase error data is added to speed error
data in a digital filter. this filter controls a pulse-width modulated (PWM) output, which controls the rotation
phase and speed of the drum.When the error is zero, the PWM circuit outputs a waveform with a 50% duty cycle.
The phase counter error detector compares the phase of the DPG pulse (tach pulse),which contains video head
phase information, with a reference signal. In the actual circuit , the comparison is carried out by comparing the
head-switching (HSW) signal,which is delayed by a counter that is reseted by DPG, with a reference signal. The
reference signal is the REF 30Hz signal,which differs between record and playback as follows.
- Record : V sync signal extracted from the video signal to be recorded (frame rate signal, actually 1/2V sync).
- Playback : 30Hz signal divided from the system clock.
Samsung Electronics
7-21
7-4 Video Circuit

(1) Luminance Signal Recording System
VIDEO-IN
48
AGC
DET
50
34
VIDEO
AGC
F. B
CLAMP
6dB
AMP
QV/QH
INSERT
FM
MOD
MAIN
EMPH
REC
FM EQ
W/D
CLIP
AMP
LPF
52 54
VIDEO OUT
65
OSD
56
VIDEO OUT
61
6dB
AMP
NL
EMPH
DETAIL
ENH
CLAMP
FM
AGC
REC COLOR
REC
CURRENT
AMP
IC301
94
SP H'D
88
LP H'D
LA71750M/LA71730M
Fig. 7-19 Luminance Record Process

1) Outline
Fig.7-19 shows the video signal recording system. Line input signal or tuner input signal is selected by Micom.
Input selection is done with the IN PUT button on the remote.
The selected video input signal goes to pin 36 of Luma/Chroma processor IC (IC301). And then it enters VIDEO
AGC circuit. The gain of AGC circuit is controlled by AGC detector so that the output is constant (approx. 2Vp-p).
The output signal of AGC is clamped by the FBC(Feed Back Clamp) circuit. This signal appears at pin 65, after
being amplified at the internal video amp and driver.
The output signal from the clamp circuit enter the detail enhancer circuit. In the detail enhancer circuit, the low
level high frequency video signal is emphasized to improve the original signals frequency characteristics.
onlinear emphasis circuit is employed to improve S/N and frequency response characteristics together with the
following main emphasis. Noise effects the FM wave at a higher frequency, so the S/N can be improved by
emphasizing the higher frequency before recording and by suppressing the play signal during demodulation.
The difference of non linear emphasis from main emphasis is that the emphasis characteristics change is depending on the input level. The gain of the emphasis circuit is inversely proportional to the level of the high frequency
component of the signal. That is, if the high frequency portion of the signal is low the main emphasis circuit will
amplify the signal.
7-22
Samsung Electronics
2) Main Emphasis Circuit

The dynamically emphasized luminance signal is now supplied to the main emphasis circuit where all the high
frequency components of the signal are boosted more than the low frequency components. The boosting action is
required for the high frequency components because in the FM recording method, the noise of the playback signal
increases in proportion to the modulated signal frequency or low level signal. By using the nonlinear emphasis
and main emphasis system, the total S/N ratio is increased. The output of the main emphasis circuit is then
supplied to the white and dark clip circuit.
3) White and Dark Clip Circuit
After emphasis is performed, large overshoots and undershoots in the luminance signal are limited to a specified
level. This is done to avoid FM over modulation. The output of the main emphasis circuit is then supplied to the
FM modulator circuit.
4) FM Modulator
(a) The amplitude of the FM signal is limited, so the signal is recorded on tape near the maximum
record level which increases the S/N ratio.
(b) The FM carrier is se to 3.8MHz (at the Sync tips) and the deviation to 4.8MHz by inside IC
circuit (for the white peak). The actual device which constitutes the FM modulator is a stable multivibrator.
This multivibrator generates a sine wave output of variable frequency.
The frequency of sine wave is governed by the level of the processed video signal at any given point.
Therefore, the processed video signal varies the frequency of the sine wave which is frequency modulation (FM).
During playback in LP mode, the crosstalk of the adjacent track is more apparent than is standard mode.
It appears as jitter and noise on the monitor. To reduce this noise from the screen, the FM carrier frequency has to
be 1/2fh shifted up during recording. This is done by applying the head switching pulse to the FM modulator
control pin 11 during LP recording. The FM modulated luminance signal goes to record equalizer circuit and it is
mixed with chrominance signal at the record Amp circuit inside video IC.
5) Record Amp
The frequency modulated luminance signal and chroma signal are mixed in the record amp of pre-amp block
inside video IC. Then this mixed signal is amplified and supplied to the video heads via the rotary transformer
and recorded on the magnetic tape.
Tape speed selection determines which video heads will be used.
That is, signal output from pin 88 (LP) and 94 (SP) of pre-amp block are supplied to video heads.
Control signal of speed mode is applied to pin 68(clock), 69(data) of video IC from Micom IC.
Samsung Electronics
7-23
(2) Luminance Signal Playback System
PB EQ
PHASE
CH1
SP
H'D
CH2
CH2
LP
H'D
CH1
96
91
90
91
FM
DEMOD
AMP
94
91
93
91
DOUBLE
LIMIT
PB
FM-EQ
SUB
LPF
MAIN
DE-EMPHA
FM AGC
3MHZ
LPF
CLAMP
74
91
AMP
AMP
88
87
NL
DEEMPHA
AMP
YNR Y/C
COMB
43
91
H'D S/W
71
H'D AMP S/W
65
CCD
NOISE
CANCELL
6dB AMP
F.B
CLAMP
QV/QH
VIDEO OUT
IC301
Y/C MIX
46
91
PICTURE
CTL
LA71750M/LA71730M
Fig. 7-20 Luminance Playback Process

1) Outline
The video signal recorded on the tape is picked up by CH1,CH2 head and is supplied to pre-amp block via rotary
trans. During playback, as per the speed, SP and LP head is determined by Pin 11 of respectively.
CH1 signal inputs to Pins 87 and 96 while CH2 signal inputs to Pins 90 and 93 of video IC. The pick up operation
is controlled by the head switching pulse inputted to pin 71. During the high portion of the switching pulse, CH2
is picked-up and just the opposite is true for CH1. In the pre amp IC, the FM signal is amplified 60dB and this
signal is applied to FM AGC.
2) FM AGC AMP
At the FM AGC Amp (FM), signals are automatically balanced. One of the AGC circuit outputs is fed to AGC
detector circuit which detects signal level fluctuations. The detector output signal is applied to the FM AGC Amp
to keep the output constant.This output is applied to the PB FM EQ block. FM EQ is correct the phase distortion
and level. The signal through PB EQ circuit is applied to the double limiter.
3) Double Limiter Circuit
A FM signal on the tape which contains AM components will be read during playback. If there is a severe AM
component, a drastic drop in FM carrier can occur. This lack of FM carrier can be called a noise region. Double
limiting is used for improving the S/N ratio and carrier loss. The playback FM signal is split into two paths, one
goes to high pass filler and sub-limiter. The other goes to the main-limiter after passing through a LPF. ONE path
of the FM signal goes to the high pass filter, so that the low frequency(AM) component can be removed, and the
other carrier is supplied to the sub-limiter. The output signal of sub-limiter is mixed with the signal from the
low-pass filter and sent to the FM demodulation circuit.
7-24
Samsung Electronics
4) FM DEMODULATOR
The FM demodulator consists of a stable mono multivibrator balanced modulator (BM) and a LPF.
The FM demodulator circuit first converts the FM signal to a pulse width modulator signal. Then the circuit
smoothes the PWM signal to demodulate the video signal.
This demodulated signal is fed to the LPF to remove its FM carrier component and any other harmonics.
The demodulated luminance signal outputs from Pin 74 and is applied to main deemphasis circuit.
To reduce demodulation noise, the output of the LPF is applied to a non-linear deemphasis circuit through YNR
circuit.
5) Main De-emphasis Circuit
Before modulation, main emphasis was performed. Because the high frequency components of video signal were
boosted more than the low frequency components in the recording mode, main deemphasis must be performed to
obtain a normal video signal.
That is this circuit returns the emphasized high frequency component to the original value.
6) Non Linear De-Emphasis Circuit
This circuit is the counter part of the dynamic pre-emphasis circuit during recording. The characteristics are also
the opposite of those in recording.
7) Drop Out Compensator/YNR Circuit
This circuit compensated for missing parts of the FM signal due to dust, dirt on the tape or irregular tape coating,
etc. The clamped video signal is supplied to the CCD 1H circuit. The 1H delayed video signal from CCD block is
also supplied to the 6MHz LPF to reject the sampling noise of CCD IC.
Then, the output of LPF is applied to Pin 43 of video IC. When the DOC detector detects the FM loss, a 1H
delayed video signal is added in place of the missing signal.
8) Noise Canceller Circuit
The noise canceller circuit removes the high frequency noise contained in the video signal which has the reverse
characteristics of the detail enhance in the recording mode. The output of the noise canceller circuit is supplied to
the Luminance and Chrominance mixer circuit. The mixed chroma and luminance signal are then output at Pin
65.
Samsung Electronics
7-25
(3) Chroma Signal Recording System

VIDEO-IN
48
50
52
VIDEO
AGC
4.43
BPF
54
1MHz
LPF
MAIN
CONVERTER
ACC
AMP
REC
CURRENT
AMP
+
REC LUMINANCE
IC301
94
SP H'D
88
LP H'D
LA71750M/LA71730M
Fig. 7-21 Chrominance Record Process

1) Outline
Fig. 7-21 shows the chroma signal recording system. The chroma signal recording process is performed by video
IC. The input video signal is fed to Pin 50 of IC through AGC AMP.
The output signal is applied to ACC amplifier. The ACC amplifier is used for both burst ACC which keeps the
burst level at a constant value in recording and the color ACC which controls the reference level of the burst ACC
with the color signal level. The color ACC works to maintain a relatively high output level by boosting low level
input signals to improve color S/N ratio.
The 4.43MHz signal are mixed in the main converter to perform frequency conversion.
The main converter is a mixer having the two types of output components which are the added frequency of
4.43+5.06=9.49MHz and the difference frequency component 629KHz.
Added frequency is rejected by the 1MHz LPF and the 629KHz down converted chroma signal is supplied to the
luma/chroma mixer of pre-amp block and then recorded on the tape via the record amp and heads.
AFC detection is performed with the head switching pulse and the fh signal generated from 321fh VOC output.
The 320fh signal is counted down to 1/8 and the resultant (40+1/8)fh (=629KHz)carrier signal is phase shifted
triggered by each horizontal sync signal which is wave shaped as a 50% duty pulse by the pulse generator.
The direction of the rotational phase shift depends on the levels of the rotary head switching signal from pin 70
and when the switching signal is "H" level, the phase is retarded by 90 degrees for every 1H, and when is is at a
"L" level it will Maintain its degree, this (40+1/8)fh phase shifted sub-carrier (PSSC) signal enters the sub-converter and the 4.43MHz carrier signal is locked at the color burst frequency by the record APC.
The PSSC signal is frequency converted into 4.43MHz +/-629KHz.
Then 5.06MHz component (=4.43MHz+/-629KHz)is extracted through a 5.06MHz BPF.
The 5.06MHz signal is used as a carrier signal for down conversion of the color signal as described previously.
7-26
Samsung Electronics
2) ACC (Automatic Color Gain Control) Circuit

The ACC is used as burst ACC in the LP mode, however it is also used for peak ACC in the SP/LP mode.
The purpose of using two different ACC operations is to improve the overall Chroma S/N ratio during playback.
In SP and SLP, there is H-sync alignment. This indicates that there is bust alignment as well. Whenever two video
tracks overlap or a video head picks up crosstalk from an adjacent track, beats are produced during playback.
Perhaps the most noticeable beats are produced by H-sync and burst. But in SP and LP, these beats occur right at
H-sync and burst and are out of the picture. In LP, however, there is no H-sync alignment and these beats can be
seen in the picture. To keep the beats at a minimum in LP, we keep the burst level constant so that the beat intensity is constant. We know that ACC acts to improve the color S/N,and in LP, the ACC detector locks at the burst
level,and keeps it constant. Thus we have ACC operation with the least beats. In SP and LP, the beats caused by
burst overlap are out of picture, so we don't really mind if the burst level changes or not. To improve the color
S/N ratio even more,we use peak ACC in SP and LP.That is,if the chroma level is too low to record, the amplification degree is increased by 3dB. However, the chroma level is sufficient for recording, this peak ACC is changed
to burst ACC to avoid over amplification. By changing the ACC according to picture color content, the burst level
may vary. The color ratio improvement is based on the color content itself during SP and LP provides a somewhat
better S/N ratio.
3) Four (4) Phase Rotation
CH1 is not changed, while CH2 is delayed 90 degrees. When the frequency is set to 629KHz, if phase is shifted by
+0/-90 it becomes 629KHz -90. The (40+1/8)fh +0/-90(=629KHz +0/-90) is balanced modulated via fsc (4.43MHz)
depending on which side band is detected. That is, the fs (40+1/8)fh +0/-90 (5.06MHz +0/-90) of total frequency
is supplied to the main converter. In record mode, the signal operates same as in play back mode. During playback, the phase is returned to original state.
4) AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) Circuit
Luminance signal is input to H-sync separator. The H-sync is separated and supplied to phase comparator.
This signal can be described as fh (Horizontal Sync frequency of input video signal). However, VCO oscillates at
321fh (5.02MHz). This 321fh is counted down by 1/321 and resultant fh is supplied to phase comparator. fh and
fh are supplied to the phase comparator for comparison of their phases. After comparison, the phase
differences is output to VCO (321fh) in terms of error voltage. Therefore, the oscillation frequency of VCO is
controlled by this error voltage. That is, if the fh phase is changed by H-sync signal fh, error voltage is changed
accordingly and if the phases of fh and fh are met due to change of VCO oscillation frequency, error voltage does
not feedback. 321fh VCO is oscillated in accordance with phase sync at fh. Therefore, (40+1/8)fh input to sub converter by phase shift is always sync horized with phase. The AFC loop performs the same operation during
record and playback. In recording, phase of VCO is in accordance with H-sync signal of current video signal.
Which in playback, the phase sync of VCO is consistent with H-sync signal which is separated from the video
signal.
Samsung Electronics
7-27
(4) Chroma Signal Playback System
CH1
SP
H'D
CH2
CH2
LP
H'D
CH1
96
91
AMP
94
91
93
91
90
91
AMP
1.3 MHz
LPF
AMP
4.43MHz
BPF 1
88
87
4.43MHz
BPF 2
AMP
COMB
H'D S/W
71
H'D AMP S/W
MAIN
CONV
ACC AMP
PB AMP
IC301
COLOR
N.C
Y/C MIX
65
91
VIDEO OUT
LA71750M/LA71730M
Fig. 7-22 Chrominance Playback Process

1) Outline
Fig. 7-22 shows the chroma signal playback system.
The FM signals picked up by the CH-1 and CH-2 video heads are supplied to the pre-amp block.
The FM signal from CH-1 and CH-2 are alternately selected by the switch and output signal as a continuous
signal. Goes to the ACC amp through the 1.3MHz LPF. The 1.3MHz LPF is used for passing only down converted
629KHz chroma signal in the playback mode. The ACC amp stabilizes the 629KHz color signal level.
The output color signal from amp then enters the main converter circuit. In the main converter circuit this signal
is mixed with the 5.06MHz phase shifted carrier signal and converted into 5.06MHz + 629KHz signals.
2) Main Converter
Inside of IC, the main converter converts the 629KHz rotational chroma signal to a 4.43MHz non-rotational signal.
The two inputs of this main converter are the 629KHz signal, which comes from the output of the ACC, and a
5.06MHz which has the same rotational phase as the 629KHz signal. It is important that the rotational phase of
the 5.06MHz signal is the same direction as the 629KHz playback chroma signal. To obtain the 4.43MHz non-rotational stable signal, the same direction rotational signal should be mixed with the rotational chroma signal.
During the conversion process, the phase is also mixed by the frequency. Therefore, when 629KHz is subtraced
from 5.06MHz,the result is the non-rotational 4.43MHz stable signal. The output signal of the main converter goes
to the 4.43MHz BPF. In the 4.43MHz BPF,the conversion noise(5.06MHz+629KHz=5.68MHz) is rejected and the
4.43MHz color signal goes to the comb filter.
In the comb filter, the crosstalk components due to the adjacent track are eliminated and the color signal is
applied to PB-AMP, BURST De-Emphasis, Killer and are applied to LUMA and CHROMA mixer input through
the CNC block.
7-28
Samsung Electronics
7-5 Hi-Fi Audio Circuit

(1) Outline
Hi-Fi circuit consists of HiFi audio LPF,VCO,BPF,FM detect circuit and switching noise compensator, PRE-AMP
etc. Linear audio consists of an ALC circuit,REC EQ circuit and a PB EQ circuit.
Hi-Fi and Linear audio share the same input selector,output selector and mute circuit.
1) REC Mode (L-CH Only)
LINEAR OUT
6
INPUT
LINEAR IN
4
IN
SEL
ALC
OUT
SEL
LPF
CONV. &
LINE AMP
PNR
REC
AMP
MOD
80
LINE
OUT
26
REC FM
Fig. 7-23 REC Mode (L-CH Only)

2) PB Mode (L-CH Only)
LINEAR IN
4
LINE
OUT
INPUT
PRE
AMP
30
31
80
BPF
OUT
SEL
CONV. &
LINE AMP
DEMOD
LPF
PNR
Fig. 7-24 PB Mode (L-CH Only)
Samsung Electronics
7-29
(2) Block Description

1) Input Selector
Input selector outputs 1 signal from 4 different signals received. It outputs 1 selected signal from tuner, rear, front.
2) Normal(Linear) Selector
Two signals,L-CH and R-CH are inputed to Hi-Fi IC.But,linear audio is capable of receiving only one signal.
Therefore the 2 input signals must be selected. Usually,the outputs are mixed signals of L-CH and R-CH unlike
the input selector, the normal selector does not amplify the selected signal.
3) Output Selector
It selects to output Hi-Fi L-CH,Hi-Fi R-CH,LINEAR and MIX(Hi-Fi+LINEAR) signals with the final output
IC pin 78(R-CH) and pin 80(L-CH).
4) Output ALC(Convertor)
ALC is used because when the input level of RF converter gets bigger,it shows up as noise on the screen.
But, this block is not used this model(ALC OFF)
5) PNR(Peak Noise Reduction)
It is a type of emphasis,de-emphasis function to eliminate noise during modulation /demodulation PNR
operates as that of VHS FORMAT to reduce noise.
6) Audio Limiter
Before modulating the signals from PNR block, it limits signals exceeding the size limit to max deviation of
+/- 150KHz.
7) VCO(Voltage Control Oscillation)
It is a modulation functionthat oscillates 1.4MHz(L-CH) and 1.8MHz(R-CH)
8) RF LPF
It is a function to eliminate the harmonic components of Hi-Fi carrier formed during VCO, which may affect
other block. Its pass-band approximately 2MHz.
9) MIXER
It mixes the Hi-Fi carrier formed in L-CH and R-CH. However,due to the frequency difference between L-CH
and R-CH,when equal amount of R-CH is recorded to tape,R-CH is must smaiier than L-CH.
Therefore, the R-CH output is approximately 10dB bigger than L-CH.
10) Current Amp
It is the final amplifier of the mixed Hi-Fi carrier IC pin 28s resistance controls current, which change the size
of IC pin 26.
11) AGC(Auto Gain Control)
It maintains uniform size of Hi-Fi envelope,which is inputed by pre-amp in play back mode.
12) BPF(Band Pass Filter)
L-CH and R-CH each has BPF. The center frequency is same as carrier frequency.
It is used to receive only Hi-Fi carrier from all signals inputed to pre-amp.
13) SW Noise Compensation
Unlike the linear audio,insted of using fixed head,drum heads are used,which creates halting points However,
in order for the audio to be headed continuously, the damages from halting points are modulated, which
creates noise. SW noise compensation is a block to minimize this particular noise.
7-30
Samsung Electronics
14) Hold Pulse

It makes standard signal(Pulse) to compensate SW noise.
15) DET(Hi-Fi/LINEAR)
From the Hi-Fi envelope inputed from pre-amp,it decides whether the signal passing through L-CH BPF is
Hi-Fi or LINEAR tape its size(the signal passing through BPF is below 10mVpp, it is not Hi-Fi, therefore, it
output linear)
16) DOC(Drop Out Compensation)
If demodulation is conducted without properly treating the damage on Hi-Fi envelope caused by scratch on
the tape,noise occurs.
In order to improve this noise occurrence,DO DET compensate the drop-out using the same methode of
compensating the switching noise when the damage on the envelope ranges 10~15mVpp.
17) ENV DET
To obtain optimal tracking,envelop must be peak to peak and micom should be in DC. It is a function to
convert Hi-Fi envelop to DC. If it is lower than 0.8V at micom,it sends linear mode date to HiFi IC.
18) Serial Data Decoder
It receives I2C BUS to enable the operation of inner block and decodes into serial data.
Samsung Electronics
7-31
7-6 Linear Audio Circuit

(1) Block Diagram
LPF
12KHz
OUTPUT
OSD
REC
AMP
BIAS
CTL
LINE
AMP
E/E
INPUT
ATT
PB
R/P
HEAD
S/W
PB ON
HPF
60KHz
PB
AMP
ALC
PB ON
REC ON
(2) Block Description

1) ATT (Attenuation)
Line amp is shared between PB mode and E/E mode, which reduces the recorded signal by 20dB and resister.
2) ALC (Auto Level Control)
If the signal level is lower than the reference signal (-6dBm) level, the output signal will equal the input signal.
However, if the input signal is higher than the reference signal, the output will not equal the input and will gen
erate uniform signal.
* ALC Application Purpose : Since linear audio is in AM (amplitude modulation) and uses magnetic recording
device, it only records limited size and as the size of input signal increases, distortion increases. To prevent
this occurance, mark sure the signal does not get bigger even if the level of distortion repodly increases.
3) LINE AMP
Line amps gain is approximately 23dB. The purpose of the line amp is to amplify to 68dB in order to obtain the
recorded signal on the tape during playback. As the amp gain increases, the passband decreases, which enables
the amplification of low frequency. However, it is impossible to amplify frequency of 10KHz to 68dB with just
1 OPAMP. Therefore, to satisfy frequency and gain.
Line amp must be constructed into 2 steps of OP AMP. (gain is fixed within IC)
4) 12KHz LPF
There are various noises to signal output. The loudest noise is the Video SYNC Frequency of 15.734KHz
In order to eliminate the Video SYNC Frequency, LPF and TRAP are combined to LPF.
7-32
Samsung Electronics
5) PB AMP
PB AMP
INPUT
OUTPUT
The diagram to the left is the playback amp and the gain input/output are as
follows.
Av = 1 +
The playback characteristic of VHS format can be satisfied by using Z1, Z2 in
the above equation.
PB amp gain should be designed to be approximately 45dB (1KHz).
Z1
Z2
Fig. 7-26 PB Amp
6) REC AMP
INPUT
PB AMP
OUTPUT
The diagram to the left is REC AMP. The amp gain is approximately 14dB.
R1 and R2 that determine the gain is located inside the IC.
It is uniform and independent to frequency. Frequency characteristics should
be considered when designing rec amp. The REC amp should be the opposite
to playback characteristics.
R1
R2
Fig. 7-27 REC Amp

7) OSC (Oscillation)
Oscillation frequency is 70KHz. Its size is approximately 45Vp-p. it operates on recoed mode. It is supplied to
audio erase head and full erase head used to erase already recorded signals.
Also, it conducts AM (Amplitude Modulation) using oscillation signals.
8) BIAS Control
Oscillation coil is used in oscillation Bias. Coil output changes according to the impedance of F/E, A/E and
R/P head connected to the coil.
9) 60KHz HPF
There must be standard signal for bias control and that signal uses HPF only to obtain oscillation signal that
comes through R/P head.
10) S/W
The switch opens when recording, shorts during playback and exterior transister is used.
Samsung Electronics
7-33
7-7 TM Circuit
(1) Outline
RF and frequency synthesized tuning system
General description : The receiving circuit consists of both ANT input and output circuits, channel selection circuit, PIF circuit and SIF circuit. The receiving circuit selects a desired broadcast signal from TV signals induced on
an antenna and sends stable video and audio signals to their respective processing circuits. The output signals
from the video and audio circuits are converted into a conventional TV signal modulated from UHF channel 21 to
UHF channel 69 by an RF modulator so that the signal can be received by conventional TV receivers.
(2) Tuner modulator block

As explained, this model is designed in one package to contain a RF MODULATOR BLOCK, TUNER BLOCK
AND IF DEMODULATOR BLOCK. Its size is greatly reduced and other noise interference can be minimized to
make performance high.
(MODULATOR SECTION)
(TUNER SECTION)
VHF
RF AMP
(IF SECTION)
Mixer
IC
SAW
Filter
IF
AMP
Video
Detector
ANT INPUT
UHF
RF AMP
RF Carrier
OSC
UHF
Mixer
VHF
OSC
UHF
OSC
PLL
IC
FM
Detector
SIF
Filter
Video
Modulator
ANT OUT
AFT
FM Modulator
TV SET
AGC
@
AUDIO IN
#%^
SDA
VIDEO IN
12
SCL SDA
AUDIO OUT
SCL
VIDEO OUT
AFT OUT
Fig. 7-28 Tuner/demodulator Block Diagram
7-34
Samsung Electronics
(3) Modulator Section

A. RF Modulator generates, from a baseband video and audio signal, PLL grequency synthesized RF TV channel
signal in UHF band.
B. PLL synthesized RF VCO, channel selection accomplished using a IIC BUS.
C. PLL synthesized audio FM (B/G ; 5.5MHz, I ; 6MHz, D/K ; 6.5MHz).
D. The 4MHz reference frequency for PLL can either be generated internally or input from an external source.
VIDEO IN
TO TUNER SECTION
ANTENNA
WHITE
CLIP
VIDEO
MOD.
FM
MOD.
CH S/W
AUDIO
CARRIER
MOD.
VIDEO
OUT
TO TV
#%
SDL SCL
AUDIO IN
Fig. 7-29 Modulator Section Block Diagram
Samsung Electronics
7-35
(4) Tuner Block

A. Low pass filter & high pass filter
This consists of IF trap circuit and UHF & VHF separation circuit. If the input signal is IF(38.9MHz), this filter
prevents interference.
B. Single tune & RF AMP
This consists of a filter circuit, RF AMP, impedance conversion circuit, image trap and a single tuning circuit. It
prevents noise and other interference signals. RF AMP is controlled by AGC come from IF DEMOD block.
C. Double tune
It consists of a double tuning circuit to improve rejection characteristic which results in a better band characteristic.
D. MOP IC (Mixer, OSC, PLL)
It consists a VHS and UHF OSC and mixer circuit. We applied a double balance mixer to have better rejection
characteristic, it shows especially various beat characteristic.
It serects channels and contains charge pump band driver. The minimum step standard frequency 50KHZ.
S.T(VL)
L.P.F
H.P.F
+
IF trap
FROM
MD SECTION
D.T(VL)
MOP IC
CXA3250AN (SONY)
SN761672A (TEXAS Instruments)
V.MIX
V.RF Amp
S.T(VL)
D.T(VH)
U.MIX
IF
S.T
VHF
OSD
H.P.F
S.T(U)
U.RF Amp
D.T(U)
UHF
OSD
IF
AMP
OSC
AMP
IF
to IF Section
Prescaler
LPF
AGC
from IF Section
Tu voltage
out
C.P.
BAND SW
VL
VH
U
REF
MOP IC
! SONY : CSA3250AN
@ T I : SN761672A
Tu
Clock
Data
+B
Fig. 7-30 Tuner Section Block Diagram
7-36
Samsung Electronics
(5) IF Block
A. SAW FILTER
It passes only needed band of the signal that is converted to IF frequency and decrease other band to minimize
the effect of adjacent channel.
B. IF AMP
IF signal ,which is selected in SAW FILTER, is amplified in IF amp frequency enough to be detected. The IF AMP
has parallel inputs & outputs structure and consists of 3 series step AMP.Each step has about 20dB gains.These
gains are controlled by AGC voltage has maximum 63dB attenuation range.
C. RF AGC CONTROL
It is adjusted to determine RF AGC working point in tuner.
D. FM DETECTOR
After removing AM signal in the limiter AMP, amplified SIF signal is applied FM detector. This FM detector is
PLL detecting type.
E. AFT DETECTER
AFT automatically controls the OSC frequency in the tuner, so that it retains a constant level.
It is a quadrature detection type. The carrier, which is detected from video det is directly input to AFT detector .
The 90 degree delayed phase signal is input at the same time to AFT detector and ,the results come out.
Detected AFT voltage is amplified by DC AMP and then applied to pin 13.
AUDIO
OUT
TO TUNER
RF AGC AFT OUT
FROM TUNER
SECTION
SAW
FILTER
SIMENS : K3561M
RF
AGC
FM
DET
VIF
AMP
IF
AGC
AGC
1'ST
AMP
AFT
VIDEO
DET
1'ST
DET
HPF
AMP
HPF
MIX
HPF
VCO
EQ
AMP
VCC
SIF
TRAP
5.5MHz
BPF
VIDEO
OUT
VCO TANK
Fig. 7-31 IF Ssection Block Diagram
Samsung Electronics
7-37
7-8 MTS Circuit

1) Outline
The MTS circuit consists of demodulator section, DSP (Digital Signal Processing) section, analog section.
The SIF signal that come from Tuner/Demode block enters into the MTS IC pin 2.
2) Demodulator section
The section is designed simulaneously perform digital demodulation and decoding of NICAM-coded TV stereo
sound, as well as demodulation of FM or AM mono TV sound.
3) DSP section
All audio baseband functions are performed by digital signal processing (DSP).
The DSP functions are grouped into three processing parts : input preprocessing, channel source selectin, and
channel postprocessing.
The input preprocessing is intended to prepare the various signals of all input sources in order to form a standardized signal at the input to the channel selector. The signals can be adjusted in volume, are processed with the
appropriate deemphasis, and are dematrixed if necessary.
Having prepared the signals that way, the channel selector makes it possible to distribute all possible source signals to the desired output channels.
All input and output signals can be processed simultaneously with the exception that FM2 cannot be processed at
the same time as NICAM. FM-identtification and adaptive deemphasis are also not possible simultaneously.
If adaptive deemphasis is active, the identification values are not valid.
4) Analog section
The analog input and output sections include full matrix switching facilities.
The switches are controlled by the ACB bits defined in the audio processing interface.
Sound IF
ANA-IN1+ @
XTL_IN
XTL_OUT
FM1/AM
FM2
NICAM A
NICAM B
Demodulator
Audio PLL
IDENT
DSP
Mono
MONO_IN P
SC1_IN_L i
SCART
A/D
SCARTL
A/D
SCARTR SCART1_L
A/D
SCART1_R
A/D
SCART1
R AUDIO_L_OUT
e AUDIO_R_OUT
SC1_IN_R O
SCART Switching Facillties
Fig. 7-32 MTS Block Diagram
7-38
Samsung Electronics
7-9 OSD Circuit

The on screen display circuit consist of a character generator decoder, video mixer, sync separator and sync generator, sync detector circuit.
The data is decoded and generates characters in syncro with composite video signal applied pin 21, 24.
Also the sync detector circuit discriminates the presence of a video signal by detecting sync, if no sync is detected,
a blue screen is displayed. In other word, the OSD circuit displays character on the video when there is a video
signal or on blue screen when there is no video signal. (No sync).
2fs IN
2
Sync signal
generator
CVin
H
V
Background
video signal
Blue Background
21
Super impose
Sync-tip
clamp
19
CVout
Dot display
control
Charater data
ROM
(128 charaters)
AFCC
6
7
AFC
Display data
readout
control
AFCLPF
Control circuits
(display position.
blinking. etc.)
registers
On-screen display
RAM
26
C-Sync out
For
SyncDetecting
H/V
seperation
24
C-Sync Slice
CVin2
Samsung Electronics
7-39
7-10 DVD System Control

1) Outline
The main micom peripheral circuit is composed of 16bit Micom (MIC1 ; ZR36705), 8M EPROM (MIC2 ; 29W800AT)
for Microcode and data save, 256Kbyte EE-PROM (MIC4 ; KS24C020) for permanent storage of data needed at
power off.
The Micom (MIC1 ; ZR36705) mounted in main board analizes the key commands of front panel or instructions of
remote control through communication with Micom (IC601 ; MN101D02X) of front and controls the devices on
board to execute the corresponding commands after initializing the devices connected with micom on board at
power on.
2) Block Diagram
FIC1
DRIVE
FAN8728
IC601
VCR MICOM
MN101D02X
RIC1
RF IC
SP3723B
MIC1
DVD MICOM
ZR36768
DATA BUS
ZIC2
DRAM
IS42S16400A-7T
ZIC5
EEPROM
24C021
MIC2
FLASH
39VF160
ADDRESS
Fig. 7-34
7-40
Samsung Electronics
7-11 RF
1) RIC1 (SP3723)
SP3723 is combined with Zoran Vaddis 6 as bipolar IC developed for DVD SERVO system.
Main features include DVD waveform equalizing, CD waveform equalizing, focus error signal generation, 3-beam
tracking error signal generation, DPD 1-beam tracking error, defect, MIRR output, Laser Power Control, etc.
(a) Basic Potentiometer

SP3723 Uses 4.5V to 5.5V and reference voltage is 1.65V.
(b) RF signal
Fig. 7-35 shows the flow of signal generated by the pick-up.
RF signal detected from pick-up is converted in to RF signal via RF interface and attennuators.
A, B, C, D signals detected from pick-up are converted in to FE, TE, PI, CE, DEFECT signals.
Fig. 7-35
Samsung Electronics
7-41
RX
s FNN
D FNP
RF SIN
EQG_CEN
EQ_BOOST
RF EQ
RFEQ-SEL
RF
EQ_FREQ
102
BYP
Fig. 7-36 shows the waveform-equalizing block diagram for the RF signal.
RF signal from the pick-up is the input of RF equalizer module of RIC1 (SP3723).
Fig. 7-36
The control parameters of DVD EQ and CD EQ are as follows.
(1) DVD CD EQ control parameter
EQG_CEN & EQ_BOOST : Changes the gain of peak frequency with EQ frequency characteristic.
EQ_FREQ : Changes the peak frequency with EQ frequency characteristic.
7-42
Samsung Electronics
7-12 DVD Servo

1) Outline
SERVO system of DVD is divided into Focusing SERVO, Tracking SERVO, SLED Linked SERVO and CLV
SERVO (DISC Motor Control SERVO).
1) Focusing SERVO ; Focuses the optical spot output from object lens onto the disc surface. Maintains a uniform
distance between object lens of Pick-up and disc (for surface vibration of disc).
2) Tracking SERVO ; Make the object lens follow the disc track in use of tracking error signal (created from Pick-up).
3) SLED Linked SERVO ; When the tracking actuator inclines outwardly as the object lens follows the track during
play, the SLED motor moves slightly (and counteracts the incline).
4) CLV SERVO (DISC Motor Control SERVO) ; Controls the disc motor to maintain a constant linear velocity
(necessary for RF signal).
2) Block Diagram
RIC1 (ZR36706)
FNN
52
FNP
53
DECK
DISC
39
18
17
12
40
11
10
9
DCN3
21
23
32
33
4
5
DCN1
13
14
24
18
20
19
22
30
29
35
34
181
182
172
RFINN
RFINP
23
173
3
12
26
11
DCN2
H3+
H3H2H1-
H1+
H2+
11
12
10
8
27
H3+
H3-
36
6
H2- 4
H12
15
14
13
7
9
H1+
H2+
OPEN
149
5
47
147
ZIC1 (ZR36768)
FIC1 (FAN8728)
18
26
21
28
25
13
46
14
1
3
1
2
Fig. 7-37
Samsung Electronics
7-43
3) Operation
(1) FOCUSING SERVO
(a) Focus Input
The focus loop is changed from open loop to closed loop, and the triangular waveform moves the object lens up
and down (at pin 167 of ZIC1 during Focus SERVO ON.) At that time, S curve is input to pin 181 of ZIC1.
ABCD (pin 28 of RIC1) signal, summing signal of PD A, B, C, D, is generated, and zero cross(2.5V) point occurs
when S curve is focused and ABCD signal exceeds a preset,constant value. The focus loop is changed to
closed loop, and the object lens follows the disc movement, maintaining a constant distance from the disc.
(these operations are same in CD and DVD).
Pin32 of ZIC1 (FOD)
Pin29 of RIC1 (ABCD)

Pin25 of ZIC1 (FEI)
Fig. 7-38
(b) Play
When focus loop closes the loop during focus servo on, both pin 25 and pin 181 of ZIC1 are controlled by VREF
voltage (approx. 1.6V), and pin 27, 28 of FIC1 are approximately 2.4 ` 2.7V.
(2) TRACKING SERVO

(a) Normal Play Mode
For DVD
Composite : The signal output from PD A, B, C, D of Pick-up, the tracking error signal (pin39 of RIC1) uses the
phase difference of A+C and B+D in RIC1, and inputs to terminal 182 of ZIC1. Then, it is output to ZIC1 pin 39
via digital equalizer, and applied to the tracking actuator through FIC1.
Pin 39 of ZIC1 is controlled by VREF(approx. 1.6V) during normal play.
Meanwhile, DVD repeats the track jump from 1 to 4 in inner direction at normal play (because data- read speed
from disc is faster than data output speed on screen).
For CD, VCD
Receive the signal output through E, F of Pick-up, from RIC1. The tracking error signal is similar to DVD.
7-44
Samsung Electronics
(b) Search Mode

Search mode : Fine seek,(Moving the tracking actuator slightly little below 255 track) and coarse search, moving
much in use of sled motor. The coarse search will be described in sled linked servo and now, the fine seek is
explained shortly.
If the object lens is located near target, cut off the tracking loop and give the control signal as many as desired
count to move the tracking actuator via ZIC1 pin 169 terminal(TRD).
(3) SLED LINKED SERVO

Normal play mode
Move SLED motor slightly by means of PWM signal in FIC1 pin 18, as the tracking actuator moves along with
track during play. Control to move the entire Pick-up as the tracking actuator moves.
Coarse serach mode
In case of long-distance search (such as chapter serach), RIC1 uses MIRR and TZC signal of RIC1-27.
Then, read ID and compute the existing track count after input of next track.
If the existing track count is within fine seek range, tracking begins using fine seek.
(4) CLV SERVO(DISC MOTOR CONTROL SERVO)

Input RF signal (from Pick-up) to RIC1 pin 63.
Detect SYNC signal from RF in FIC1, and output PWM signal for constant linear velocity.
Samsung Electronics
7-45
7-13 DVD Data Processor

1) Outline
RIC1(ZR36707) performs Sync detection, EFM demodulation and error correction and Spindle motor control (CLV
control) after inputting sliced EFM signal of RF signal at disc playback and EFM read clock (PLCK) signal generated from PLL. Outputs data which converted to the last audio and video from A/V decoder (ZIC1). ZIC1 uses external memory(64M DRAM) as buffer as well as for error correction and carries out Variable Bit Rate transfer function.
VBR function uses the external buffer as buffer to absorb the difference of transfer rate occurring because the transfer rate of disc playback is faster than data transfer rate demanded by A/V decoder (Video/Audio Signal Process
Chip).
In case of general disc refresh, the memory is almost filled up periodically. It is because Write rate to memory after
disc playback and signal process is faster than Read of A/V decoder. When the memory is filled, this status is reported by interrupt to main micom, which controls the servo to kick back the pick-up to the previous track after memorizing the last data read from disc until now. It takes some times to jump to the previous track and return to the
original(jump location) again. The memory will have an empty space because A/V decoder reads out data of memory.
When the memory has an empty space, where data can be processed and written and the pick-up correctly gets to
the original location(before kick back location) again, it reads data again avoids the interrupt of data read previously. The basic operation repeats to perform as described above.
2) Block Diagram
RFINN
RFINP
RFA_SEDN
RFA_DATA
RFA_SCLK
AAF_CE
AAF_FE
AAF_TE
AAF_PI
DEFECT
MIRR
LDON
ZIC2
64Mbit
SDRAM
RAMADD(0..11)
RAMCLK
RAMDAT(0..15)
/CS
RAMBA(0..1)
/RAS
/WE
/CAS
RAMCLk
SCL
SDA
ZIC1
(Vaddis 6E)
AV Decoder
&
CPU
FOCUS_PWM
FOCUS_DAC
MNTR
MMM
TRACK_PWM
TRACK_DAC
NNN
SLED_PWM
FR
SPDL_SENS
OPEN
CLOSE
MD_MUTE
LD_MUTE
ZIC5
EEPROM
SRQ
SCLK
RXD
TXD
MEMDA(15...0)
MD
MEMAD(19...0)
RRQ
FLASHCS
RD
FIC1
(FAN8728)
Moter Driver
RAMDQM
RIC1
(SP3723B)
RF IC
FIC1
(GMS81C2020)
Front Panel
Controller
27MHz
ZIC3
Flash Memory
8Mbit
Fig. 7-39
7-46
Samsung Electronics
3) Waveform Description
It measures the timing that data processed in RIC1 at DVD playback.
Fig. 7-40
CH1 : STROBE (DIC1-69, CLOCK)
CH2 : REQ (DIC1-70, DATA REQUEST)
CH3 : DACK (DIC1-58, DATA ACKNOWLEDGE)
CH4 : SDATA (DIC1-60~67, DATA)
Samsung Electronics
7-47
7-14 DVD Video

1) Outline
ZIC1(A/V decoder with video encoder) diverges from the 27MHz crystal, then generates VSYNC and HSYNC.
ZIC1(A/V decoder with video encoder) does RGB encoding, copy guard processing and D/A conversion of 8bit
video data internally inputted from video decoder block by MIC1 (Micom).
Video signal converted into analog signal is outputted via amplifier of analog part.
(Main Board)
A/V Decoder
Vaddis5E With
Video Encoder
ZIC1
(Output Board)
Video data
CVBS
CVBS
Y/B/U
C/R/V
CVBS/G/Y
CVBS
LOW
PASS
FILTER
(6MHz)
6dB
AMP
&
75ohm
Drive
C
Y
Pb
Pb
Pr
LA73054
Pr
Front
Micom
FIC1
VIDEO SELECT S/W
: S-VIDEO/COMPONENT/525P
SELECTING
Fig. 7-41 Video Output Block Diagram
2) NTSC/PAL Digital Encoder

ZIC1 inputted from pin 142 with 27MHz generates HSYNC and VSYNC which are based on video signal.
ZIC1 is synchronous signals with decoded video signal and control the output timing of 8bit video signal of ITUR601 format.
The inputted 8bit data which decoded from video decoder block is demuxed with each 8bit of Y, R-Y, B-Y or
R, G, B. The separate signal is encoded to NTSC/PAL by control of CPU1.
The above signals, which are CVBS (Composite Video Burst Synchronized)/G (GREEN)/Y [PIN139],
Y (S_VIDEO)/B (BRUE)/Pb[PIN145] and C (S_VIDEO)/R (RED)/Pr [PIN151], are selectively outputted CVBS
+S_VIDEO, RGB/Component by the rear switch. In Course of encoding, 8bit data can extend to 10bit or more.
To convert the extended data to quantization noise as possible, ZIC1 adopts 10bit D/A converter.
ZIC1 perform video en-coding as well as copy protection.
3) Amplifier (VIC1 : MM1657A)

VIC1 is 6dB amplifier.
Based on CVBS signal, the final output level must be 2Vpp without 75ohm terminal resitance.
Because the level of video encoder output is only 1.1Vpp, the level is adjusted with the special amplifier.
When mute of pin 5 is high active, if the pin is floating and connecte to power, the output signal is never
ouputted. CVBS, Y, C, Cr, Cb outputted from video encoder are inputted to VIC1 (Pin 2, 8, 6, 16, 14).
The signal to which gain is adjusted by amplifier is outputted from jack via 75ohm Resistance (VR30~VR34).
7-48
Samsung Electronics
7-15 DVD Line-Out Audio

1) Outline
4 data (Data 0 3) are output from the A/V decoder (ZIC1 : ZR36768). Among them Data 3 is 2Ch audio output for
Line-out, and Data 1, 2, and 3 are 5.1Ch audio output for Digital Amp.
Transmitted Audio Data 3 is converted into analog signal, and goes through the Post Filter and amplifier, and
delivered to the VCR PCB via CN101 as audio signal for Line-out.
In case of CD/DVD, Audio Data 3 signal is transmitted from Data Process (RIC1 : ZR36707) to A/V decoder
(ZIC1 : ZR36768).
2) Block Diagram
XCK
BCK
LRCK
AOUT3
CN1
LINE-OUT
DAIC3
(NSP6241)
Modulator
BCK
LRCK
DATA
DAIC2
(PCM1742)
PAC
ZIC1
(ZR36768)
A/V Decoder
AMP
AMP
L
R
22
24
TO
VCR
HEADPHONE-OUT
AMP
AMP
L
R
40
38
Fig. 7-42
Samsung Electronics
7-49
7-16 Digital Amp Audio

1) Outline
Audio Data 0, 1, and 2 that are transmitted using Digital Audio Data output (5.1 channel) that is output from the
A/V decoder (ZIC1 : ZR36768) are converted into PWM signal at the DAIC3 (NSP6241), which is a 5.1 channel
Digital Audio PWM Processor IC, amplified in the Digital Audio Amp consisting of 5.1 channel, and output as
speaker 5.1 channel audio signal.
In case of CD/DVD, Audio Data signal transmitted from Data Process (RIC1 : ZR36707) to A/V decoder
(ZIC1 : ZR36768) is converted into PWM signal in the Digital Audio PWM Processor.
Audio signal (VCR, TV, FM/AM, LINE-IN 1, 2, 3) that is switched in the VCRs MUX is transmitted to
DAIC6(AK5353VT), converted into digital audio signal by A/D converter, input to the A/V decoder (ZIC1 :
ZR36768) pin 129, and 2.1Ch. ~ 5.1Ch. of Digital audio data is output from the Audio DSP of the A/V decoder,
and each of these signals is converted into PWM signal in the Digital Audio PWM Processor.
2) Block Diagram
OUT2A
OUT2B
XCK
LRCK
ZIC1
A/V
Decode
(ZR36768)
BCK
Aout 0
Aout 1
Aout 2
DAIC3
(NSP6241)
Modulator
OUT4A
OUT4B
OUT6A
OUT6B
OUT1A
OUT1B
PACIC1
(TAS5111)
PAFIC1
(TAS5112)
PASIC2
(TAS5112)
PASIC1
(TAS5112)
CENTER
FRONT L
SURROUND L
FRONT R
SURROUND R
SUB WOOFER
Fig. 7-43
7-50
Samsung Electronics
3) PWM Signal Conversion and Volume Control

DAIC3 (NSP6241) functions as the Digital Audio PWM process and volume control for 5.1 channel. It changes the
pulse duration of Digital audio Data input from the A/V decoder (ZIC1 : ZR36768) according to the signal to
deliver PWM signal to the Digital AMP, and adjusts the amplifier volume with the digital volume control received
from the Micom.
<Principle of PWM>
It is a continuous level modulation technique suitable for audio signal that changes continuously.
Carrier signal is added to audio signal, cut at certain levels, and then amplified.
Comparator
Pulse Width Modulator
Input
Carrier
PWM Output
3 bits PCM
1 bit PWM
000
Carrier
001
010
Input
011
100
101
110
PWM
Output
111
Fig. 7-44
4) Digital AMP
TAS5112DFD/TAS5111 is a Digital Amplifier that operates according to Full Bridge (H-Bridge) method. Each
PWM signal output from AIC11(NSP6241) is transmitted to each input jacks (Pin 1, 2, 15, 16) of 7 combined
Digital Amplifier and this signal is amplified by TAS5112 consisting of 4 FET, and finally output to the speaker
through the termination of LPF.
Samsung Electronics
7-51
5) Description of Waveform
The figure below shows the measurement of timing of digital audio signal in DAIC11 during DVD playback.
MCLK
BCLK
LRCLK
DATA0
Fig. 7-45
CH1: MCLK-IN (Audio Master Clock Signal : 12.288MHz)
CH2: BCLK (Audio Bit Clock Signal : 3.072MHz)
CH3: LRCK (L, R-Ch differentiating Signal Clock Signal : 48KHz)
CH4: DATA0 (PCM Audio Data Signal)
7-52
Samsung Electronics
8. VCR Deck Operating Description

8-1 Features of Mechanism
The following items describe features of the mechanism in VCR.
(1) This VCR uses 3-motor system consisted of a cylinder motor, capstan motor, and loading motor.
A capstan motor is used to drive the reel and the driving force is transmitted throuch the belt capstan.
The cassette loading, tape loading, and mode shift operation are performed by the loading motor.
(2) The time duration from cassette-in to picture appearance is shortened by employing the loading drive mechanism (automatic transferring operation from the cassette loading to the tape loading by rotating the loading
motor continuously), and by increasing the speed of the tape loading, etc
(3) Employment of the full loading system shortens time required to shift the mode such as STOP to PLAY-BACK
picture display.
(4) To simplify wiring and others, the electrical components relating to operation of the mechanical deck, such as
sensors, mode switch, servo microcomputer, etc. are mounted on the PCB arranged all over the bottom side of
the mechanical deck.
8-2 Basic Configuration of Mechanism

As shown in Fig. 8-1, the mechanism of VCR is configured with five main blocks, and each operation is precisely
controlled by the microcomputer built in the system control section.
First, load a video cassette tape in VCR :
(1) The cassette is automatically set on the reel disc.
(2) The tape is pulled out from the cassette, and wrapped around the cylinder.
(3) The cylinder turns in a constant speed rate synchronizing with the vertical Sync. signal of video signal.
(4) The tape runs in synchronization with cylinder rotation and traces the video tracks precisely.
(5) The running tape is taken up by the reel, the tape feeding side is given with a proper tension so that tape is not
slacked.
The above series of operations are performed under control of the system control section. The system control section also sends commands to each mechanism according to the operation buttons, thus the VCR is designed so
that various operations such as recording, playback, special playback, FPS/RPS, and FF/REW, etc. are correctly
performed.
(Capstan drive section)
(Cylinder section)
PG
Cylinder
FG
Cylinder servo
Capstan
Control head
Capstan servo
Cylinder servo
FG
System control
Start sensor
Cam slider
Tension post
Tape sensor
Reel brake
REC-inhibiting SW
Tape loading
Pinch lever
Cassette holder
(Front loading setion)
FL
cam gear
Idle gear
Loading motor
(Loading motor drive section)
Reel sensor
(Front loading setion)
Fig. 8-1 Basic Configuration of Mechanism

Samsung Electronics
8-1
VCR Deck Operating Description
8-3 Main Mechanism and Functions

8-3-1 Tape Path System
The tape come out from the supply reel (S) of the video cassette runs through paths shown in Figs. 8-2 and 8-3,
and is taken up by the take-up (T) reel. (S stands for the supply reel, and T for the take-up reel, hereafter.)
At S reel side (tape enterance side of the cylinder) against the cylinder, a tension post to allow the tape surface to
contact with each head with a proper tension which assures stable running, an FE head which erases entire data
of the tape, and an S guide roller which restricts tape motion in upward/downward direction are provided.
In the same way, a T guide roller, audio head to record audio signals at upper side of the tape, control head to
record and reproduce a control signal at lower side of the tape, and an audio erase head to erase only the audio
signals and perform after-recording in parallel with the audio head are provided at T reel side. (tape exit side of
the cylinder).
The guide parts marked with asterisks (*) are equipped with the adjusting mechanism to stabilize the tape running or to record and reproduce the signals precisely.
*
S slant guide
S guide roller
T guide roller
T slant guide
FE head
ACE head base
* ACE head position
adjusting screw
Pinch roller
Cylinder
RPS
(released by
FF/REW mode)
Tension lever
& tension post
No.9 guide
(pulled out at
RPS mode)
Capstan motor
ACE adjusting screw
No.8 guide
Tilt
ACE head position adjusting slit

(Insert slot-type screwdriver.)
Azimuth
Height
Fig. 8-2 Tape Path System

Cylinder
T slant guide
S slant guide
Tension post
ACE head
Capstan
No.9 guide
Pinch roller
FE head
*
No.8 guide
*
S guide roller
*
T guide roller
show the locations to be adjusted.
Fig. 8-3 Guide Path System

8-2
Samsung Electronics
8-3-2 Reel Drive System

The reel drive system consists of a capstan motor as a drive power source, belt as a power transmission mechanism, clutch mechanism, idle gears, and a reel disc. Selecting of forward rotation or reverse rotation is carried out
by an idle gear which changes its rotating direction according to rotating direction of the clutch holder.
Reel take-up torque is selected according to an operation mode.
In the record, playback, fps, rps modes, the reel take-up torque is controlled by the clutch mechanism, thereby the
tape fed by the capstan is taken up with a proper torque.
In the FF and REW modes, the clutch enters a direct connecting status in which the clutch mechanism does not
operate and the capstan drive torque is transmitted without reduction, so a high speed taking-up is enabled.
S slant guide
S guide roller
T guide roller
T slant guide
Video tape (Magneticside)
FE head
ACE head
No. 8 guide
Cylinder
Tension post
Pinch roller
Capstan
No. 9 guide
Tape guide
Tape guide
S (Supply) reel disc

Idle gear
Capstan belt
Clutch gear (Clutch mechanism)
T (Tape-up) reel disc
Fig. 8-4 Reel Drive System
Samsung Electronics
8-3
8-4 Basis of the Mechanism

8-4-1 Front Loading
Cassette IN
(1) When a video cassette is inserted into the cassette

holder and pushed furthermore, FL arm lever is
rotated by motion of the cassette holder. The rotation
of FL arm lever makes the horizontal moving of FL
drive slider.
(2) When the information of Start Sensor OFF is
transmitted to the microcomputer, the loading motor
starts to rotate.
(3) The rotation is transmitted in a sequence shown
below :
Loading motor - worm gear - worm wheel FL Cam Gear - FL Drive Slider - FL Arm Lever Cassette Holder
(4) The video cassette is horizontally moved.
(5) The cassette tape is vertically moved.
In this case, the cassette lid is opened.
(6) The cassette tape is set on the reel disc, and loading
operation completes.
(7) The cassette tape is loaded.
(8) The status becomes full loading.
(9) When the cassette is out, the reverse steps of the
above procedure are carried out.
Start Sensor OFF

Microcomputer
Loading Motor ON
Loading Motor
Worm Gear
Worm Wheel
FL Cam Gear
FL Drive Slider
FL Arm Level
Cassette Holder
Cassette Horizontal Motion
Cassette Vertical Motion
Cassette Door Open
Microcomputer
Cassette Loading Complete
Tape Loading
Full Loading Mode
Fig. 8-5
Loading motor
FL arm lever
FL drive slider
FL camgear
Worm wheel
Fig. 8-6 Drive Transmission Path
8-4
Samsung Electronics
8-4-2 Cassette loading/unloading Modes

When a cassette is entered in the VCR, the cassette is set on the reel disc by the front loading mechanism.
In this case, the tension post, loading tape guide, capstan motor, and the No.9 guide are positioned inside of the
tape in the cassette case.
S slant guide
Tension post
T guide roller
ACE head
T slant guide
No. 8 guide
FE head
Cylinder
Pinch roller
Capstan
No. 9 guide
Tape guide
S guide roller
Tape guide

Idle gear
Capstan belt
Fig. 8-7 Cassette IN/OUT Mode
Samsung Electronics
8-5
8-4-3 Tape Loading

A full loading system is employed.
In the full loading system, the tape loading starts at the same time when the cassette loading operation has completed and cassette has been mounted, and the tape is pulled out, wrapped around the cylinder and the mechanism enters the stop status under this condition.
Cylinder
S guide roller
T guide roller
Guide post
FE head
Guide post
ACE head
No. 8 guide
Pinch roller
Capstan
Tension post
No. 9 guide
Tape guide
Tape guide
Fig. 8-8 Tape Loading
8-4-4 Playback Standby Mode

In the full loading system, the tape loading starts at the same time when the cassette mounting has completed, the
mechanism shifts to the playback position, and enters the standby status with keeping tape wrapped around the
cylinder.
In this case, tape tension applied to the cylinder is decreased to protect the tape and to prevent the tape from
scratches.
8-6
Samsung Electronics
8-4-5 FF/REW Modes

The reels enter a free status by rotating the loading motor to go to FF/REW position.
In this case, the capstan motor rotates in colck-wise direction in the REW mode. The idle gear is swung rightward
or leftward according to the rotating direction of the capstan motor. As a result, the T reel rotates in the FF mode
or the S reel rotates in the REW mode, thus taking up the tape to the rotating reel.
S guide roller
S slant guide
T guide roller
T slant guide
ACE head
FE head
No. 8 guide
Cylinder
Tension post
Pinch roller
Capstan
No. 9 guide
Tape guide
Tape guide

Idle gear
Capstan belt
Fig. 8-9 FF/REW Mode
Samsung Electronics
8-7
8-4-6 Record/Playback Modes

When the record or playback button is pressed, the tape is fed by the rotation of the capstan motor.
In this case, a tension post touches the tape and braking froces created by the band brake linked with the tension
post is applied to the S reel, thereby stabilizing the tape tension. The tape fed by the capstan is taken up around
the T reel. The T reel is driven with a constant torque generated by transmitting rotation of the capstan motor to
the clutch mechanism.
S guide roller
S slant guide
T guide roller
T slant guide
ACE head
FE head
No. 8 guide
Pinch roller
Capstan
No. 9 guide
Tape guide
Cylinder
Tension post
Tape guide

Capstan belt
Idle gear
Fig. 8-10 Record/Playback Mode
8-8
Samsung Electronics
8-5 System Control

In the VCR, complex mechanism, video, audio, servo circuits, etc. must be operated in specified timings matched
each other. The system control circuit performs entire controls for the VCR.
An automatic stop function is also provided to protect important tape if a trouble occurs on the complex mechanism and the electrical circuits.
For this purpose, status of each part of the mechanism is always monitored with various sensor switches, and the
microcomputer controls collectively the unit so that the best condition is kept.
Moreover, the microcomputer controls signal switchings for each circuit according to the mechanism status.
Remote
control
Remote
Main microcomputer Loading motor control

(Voltage, direction)
Loading motor drive
M Loading motor
broken safety tab

REC-inhibition
Mode sensor
(Detecting of mechanical mode position)
Mode SW
(Detection of cassette-in/cassette-out)
Stsrt sensor
Tape
Tape stsrt sensor

Tape end LED
reel retation
Take up Abnormal
FF/REW speed control
Supply
Key matrix
Front button
Input
T reel
sensor
Abnormal reel retation

FF/REW speed control
S reel
sensor
Current control
Capstan motor control
(Speed direction)
Capstan
motor drive
FG pulse
AUDIO
VIDEO
AMP
TUNER
IIC BUS
FG
CTL pulse
(Linear time counter)
Control
REC control
POWER ON/OFF
REC mute
TV/VCR
FM/AM
M Capstan motor
Cylinder motor control

PLL Data/Clock
FG/PG pulse
Cylinder
motor drive
M Cylinder motor
PG
FG
Fig. 8-11 System Control Block Diagram
Samsung Electronics
8-9
8-6 System Control and Mechanical Operations

8-6-1 Mechanical Operation
The operation of mechanism is performed by rotation of the loading motor, and the transmission path of the operation is as shown in Fig. 8-12.
Loading Motor
FL cam gear
FL drive slider
Cam slider
FL arm lever
Cassette holder
Mode SW
No.9 guide
Loading drive gear
S, T slider
Pinch drive lever
Pinch lever
Tension drive lever
Tension lever
S brake
T brake
Up/Down lever
Fig. 8-12 Transmission Path of Operation
Fig. 8-14 shows each mode and mechanism status in each mode concerned with the rotation of the FL cam gear or
cam slider shift. The mechanism operates as shown in Fig. 8-13 according to the timing chart in Fig. 8-14.
Note :
The Start Sensor is actuated by the horizontal moving of Slider FL Drive and turned on or off by insertion or ejection of a cassette.
8-10
Samsung Electronics
<Top View>
T slider assembly
Pinch assembly
Loading motor
S slider assembly
FL cam gear
No. 9 guide lever

Tension arm
Joint lever
T brake (soft)
S brake (off)
Idle lever assembly
<Bottom View>
T loading lever assembly
S loading lever assembly
Loading motor
Loading drive gear

FL cam gear
Joint gear 1
Cam slider
T brake
Pinch drive lever
S brake
Tension drive lever
Joint gear 2
Fig. 8-13 Mechanical Operation

Samsung Electronics
8-11
Fig. 8-14 Mecha Timing Chart
8-12
Samsung Electronics
(1) There are two STOP modes and two FF/REW modes.
1) STOP 1
This mode is performed when PB and FF/REW is not done for 5 miniute at power on.
The small load is given to S REEL DISC and T REEL DISC. And the cylinder motor is stopped.
2) STOP 2
This mode is performed when you press the stop button as performing FF/REW.
The large load is given to S REEL DISC and T REEL DISC.
3) FF/REW 1
This mode is performed when
The tape load is small during performing FF and reducing speed.
The tape load is large during performing REW.
The small load is given to S REEL DISK and no load is given to T REEL DISC.
4) FF/REW 2
This mode is performed when
The tape load is large during performing FF.
The tape load is small during performing REW and reducing speed
No load is given to S REEL DISK and the small load is given to T REEL DISK.
(Cf) According to acceleration, deceleration, and the location of tape, tension control which is caused by
converting FF/REW 1 and FF/REW 2 each other is performed during FF or REW.
(2) The condition of S Brake and T Brake at each mode.
< S BRAKE>
1) OFF BRAKE (Unloading completion, RPS, PLAY, FF/REW 2)
- S BRAKE is detached from S REEL DISC completely. So S REEL DISC is free.
Fig. 8-15
2) SOFT BRAKE(during LOADING, STOP 1, FF/REW 1)
- The small load is given to S REEL DISC.
Fig. 8-16
Samsung Electronics
8-13
3) MAIN BRAKE (STOP 2)

- The large load is given to S REEL DISC.
Fig. 8-17
< T BRAKE>
1) OFF BRAKE (PLAY, FF/REW 1)
- T BRAKE is detached from T REEL DISC completely. So T REEL DISC is free.
Fig. 8-18
2) SOFT BRAKE (UNLOADING Completion ,STOP 1, FF/REW 2 )
- The small load is given to T REEL DISC.
Fig. 8-19
8-14
Samsung Electronics
3) REVERSE SEARCH BRAKE (RPS)

- The medium load is given to T REEL DISC.
Fig. 8-20
4) MAIN BRAKE (on the loading, STOP 2)
- The large load is given to T REEL
Fig. 8-21
Samsung Electronics
8-15
8-6-2 Mode Sensor Drive

The mode sensor converts each mode of the mechanism into an electrical signal and transmits it to the microcomputer. The FL cam gear is rotated by the loading motor, and the cam slider slides after operation of the cassette
holder.
Then the mode switch also rotates synchronized with the cam slider and outputs a signal corresponding to each
mode. This signal is transmitted to the microcomputer and the microcomputer stops the cam slider at a specified
angle, thus establishing each mode.
The IC601 controls Capstan Motor Drive IC for each mode to make the loading motor rotate in forward or reverse
direction, thereby setting the mechanism at a specified position.
The mode switch develops three outputs A, B and C.
The circuit configuration of the mode sensor drive is shown in Fig. 8-22.
CN604
1
L.M B+
LM L 59
8
9
10
Load (+)
~
IC601
CAPSTAN
MOTOR
DRIVE IC
1
2
Loading motor
Load (-)
AL 5V
LM R 60
AL 5V
SW603
Mode SW
A 85
B 86
C 87
A
B
C
Fig. 8-22 Mode Sensor Drive
8-16
Samsung Electronics
8-6-3 Operations in Each Mode

[1] Cassette loading & Tape loading mode
<Cassette loading>
(1) The FL cam gear is in the Cassette unloading (position I)position, and the cassette holder is in the out status
(start sensor ON). Under this condition, each motor is stopped.
(2) Status of the mechanism is as follows.
1) S.T guide rollers, tension post, No.9 guide are in unloading status and housed in the reel disc side.
2) S brake is released and T brake is in soft brake status.
3) The clutch holder assembly is in clutched status and idle lever assembly is enabled to be engaged with both
S and T reel discs.
(3) When a cassette is inserted, the lock lever of cassette holder is released from the stopper, the cassette holder
moves, the FL arm lever rotates, and the FL Drive Slider slides, thereby closing the start sensor.
(4) IC601 controls Capstan Motor Drive IC to rotate the loading motor in forward direction, and move the cassette
holder. At the same time, the capstan motor rotates in the reverse direction and moves the cassette
down (vertical motion) while rotating the S reel disc.
(5) The cassette lid opens when the vertical motion starts.
(6) When the vertical motion has completed and the cassette is mounted, the capstan motor rotates in the reverse
direction. At that time the position a is detected with the cam slider shifted and the loading/capstan
motors are stopped. After 300msec the loading motor rotates in the forward direction and enters the tape
loading operation.
T slider assembly
S slider assembly
No. 9 guide lever

Tension arm
S brake (off)
T brake (soft)
Idle lever assembly
Fig. 8-23 Cassette-Loading Mode (Position I)
Samsung Electronics
8-17
<Tape loading>
(1) After slot-in operation (cassette loading), FL cam gear rotates and the cam slider starts shifting, and a loading
gear is ready to start.
Under this condition, the mechanism status is as follows :
1) The T main brake actuates so that tape does not com out from the T reel during the loading operation.
(2) The cylinder starts to rotates after the loading motor is rotated.
(3) When the cam slider reaches the position II (loading/unloading modes), the mechanism enters the loading
status and operates as described below.
1) S,T sliders are moved through the loading drive gear and trun on the tension post.
2) The No. 9 guide is loaded.
3) The pinch roller is loaded up to front of the capstan.
4) The head cleaner is actuated during loading operation.
5) The S soft brake is actuated.
(4) When the cam slider passes through the position III, and detects the position IV (playback standby mode),
the loading motor stops. Under this condition, the mechanism status is described as below :
The pinch roller is pressed to the capstan.
The No.9 guide is stored in the cassette.
The tension post touches the tape, band brake force is applied, and the tension servo brake mechanism
actuates.
Brakes for the reel discs are all off.
T slider assembly
S slider assembly
Tension lever
No. 9 guide lever
S brake (off)
T brake (soft)
Fig. 8-24 Tape Loading Operation (Position II)
8-18
Samsung Electronics
<Playback Stand-by (Stop) mode>

(1) The tape loading operation completes and the loading motor stops.
(2) In the same way as in the playback mode, the capstan motor rotates in forward direction and the T reel
disc takes up the tape. (For more details, refer to the playback mode.)
(3) After running the tape for 0.6s, the mechanism rotates the capstan in the reverse direction for 0.3s to
slack the tape properly with pinch roller pressed.
(4) If nothing is operated for about 5 minutes, the loading motor rotates in the forward direction and the cam
position reaches the position V, and both the loading motor and the cylinder motor stop.
(5) During this period, the video and audio systems are in the same status as in the stop mode.
[2] Tape unloading & Cassette unloading
<Tape Unloading>
(1) When the [EJECT] button is pressed in the stop mode, the mechanism enters the eject mode.
(2) IC601 controls cylinder motor drive IC to make the cylinder motor rotates.
(3) IC601 makes the loading motor rotate in the reverse direction, and shifts the cam slider.
1) The mechanism components move in the reverse direction against the loading operation.
(4) When the cam slider reaches the position II, IC601 makes the capstan motor rotate in the reverse direction
(LP X11) and takes up the tape at a specified torque using the clutch mechanism.
(5) When the cam slider reaches the position I, it brakes the capstan motor to stop, and then stops the loading
motor after 230ms passed.
<Cassette unloading>
(1) Furthermore, IC601 makes the loading motor rotate in the reverse direction and also the capstan motor in
reverse direction, applies braking force to the capstan motor by detecting the tape start sensor
OFF --> ON, and the capstan motor stops.
(2) IC601 makes the loading motor stop after 150ms passed from sensing ON.
(3) Also IC601 makes the loading motor rotate in the forward direction after 120ms passed.
Samsung Electronics
8-19
[3] Stop mode

(1) The cam slider is in the stop mode (position V) and each motor stops.
(2) The mechanism status is as follows :
1) The S, T guide rollers are in the loading status.
2) The pinch roller is kept away from the capstan.
3) The tension post is shifted to the reel disc side. That is, the band brake is released from the ON status and
the back tension is also released.
4) The S, T soft brakes are being applied.
T slider assembly
S slider assembly
Pinch assembly (off)
Tension lever (off)
S brake (off)
T brake (soft)
Fig. 8-25 Stop Mode (Position V)
8-20
Samsung Electronics
[4] FF/REW mode

(1) When the [REW] button is pressed in playback standby mode, the mode enters the FF/REW mode.
(2) IC601 controls Capstan Motor Drive IC and makes the loading motor rotate in the forward direction.
The loading motor stops when the cam position reaches the position VI, VII (FF/REW mode).
The mechanism status is as follows :
1) The pinch roller is OFF.
2) The No. 9 guide is once loaded but immediately returned.
3) The tension post is moved to the reel disc side. That is, the band brake is released from the ON status and
the back tension is released.
4) The clutch holder assembly is in the direct status and the capstan driving force is directly transmitted to the
reel disc.
5) Brakes for the reel discs are as follows :
VI position FF/REW 1 mode (S Brake : soft brake, T Brake : off)
VII position FF/REW 2 mode (S Brake : off, T Brake : soft brake)
(3) IC601 makes the capstan motor rotate in the forward direction and the idle gear transmits the rotation to the
S/T reel discs to take up the tape.
[5] FF/REW to STOP mode
(1) When the [STOP] button is pressed in the REW mode, the mechanism enters the playback standby mode.
(2) IC601 makes the loading motor rotate in the reverse direction and stops at the position V.
With this mode shift, the mechanism actuates S, T main brakes to stop the tape. Then, the capstan motor also
stops by braking force 70ms after detecting e position.
(3) IC601 makes the loading motor rotate in the reverse direction again and stops the loading motor when the
cam slider reaches the position IV (playback mode), thus setting the playback standby mode.
T slider assembly
Pinch assembly (OFF)
Tension lever (OFF)
No. 9 guide lever (OFF)
S brake (OFF)
T brake (soft brake)
Fig. 8-26 FF/REW 2 Mode (Position VII)
Samsung Electronics
8-21
[Playback mode]
(1) When the [PLAY] button is pressed in the stop mode, the mechanism enters the playback mode.
(2) IC601 controls cylinder motor drive IC and rotates the cylinder motor.
(3) IC601 controls Capstan Motor Drive IC to rotate the loading motor in the reverse direction and stops the motor
when the cam slider reaches the position IV (playback mode). (When operating from the playback standby
mode, the cam slider has been already on the position IV.) The mechanism works as follows :
1) The pinch roller moves toward the capstan side and press fits the capstan.
2) The No.9 guide is loaded once and then returned immediately.
3) The tension post touches the tape, the band braking force is applied, and the tension servo mechanism
works.
4) The clutch holder assembly enters clutched condition.
5) S,T brakes are released.
(4) IC601 makes the capstan rotate in the forward direction and feeds the tape. The idle gear transmits the
rotation to the T reel disc and the reel disc takes up the tape at a constant torque by the clutch mechanism.
(5) IC601 controls the video circuit and switches the playback screen.
(6) The recording speed data identified by IC601 is displayed in the Led module.
Pinch assembly (ON)
Tension lever (ON)
No. 9 guide lever (OFF)
S brake (OFF)
T brake (OFF)
Fig. 8-27 Playback Mode (Position IV)
8-22
Samsung Electronics
<Still mode>
(1) When the [PAUSE] button is pressed in the playback mode, the mechanism enters the still mode.
The cam slider is in the position IV (playback mode), the cylinder motor is rotating, and the capstan motor is
rotating in the forward direction.
(2) IC 601 controls the audio circuit and actuates the audio mute function.
(3) The capstan motor enters the intermittent operation mode and then stops.
(4) IC 601 maintains the recording speed data just before the still operation.
(5) In the slow mode, the capstan motor rotates continuously in the intermittent driving.
<FPS mode>
(1) When the [FF] button is pressed in the playback mode, the mechanism enters the FPS mode (forward picture
search). The cam slider is in the position IV (playback mode), the cylinder motor is rotating, and the capstan
motor is rotating in the forward direction.
(2) IC 601 controls the audio circuit to actuate the audio mute operation.
(3) IC601 makes the capstan rotate at 7 times for SP, 21 times for SLP to feed the tape, respectively.
The tape is taken up at a constant torque by the clutch mechanism. (The mechanical operation is the same as
that in the playback mode.)
(4) The recording speed data identified by IC601 is displayed on the Led module.
Samsung Electronics
8-23
<RPS mode>
(1) When the [REW] button is pressed in the playback mode, the mechanism enters the RPS mode.
The cam slider is in the position IV (playback mode), the cylinder motor is rotating, and the capstan motor is
rotating in the forward direction.
(2) IC601 controls the audio circuit to actuate the audio mute operation.
(3) IC601 controls Capstan Motor Drive IC to make the loading motor rotate in the reverse direction.
After 180ms the loading motor stops for 250ms. During the mode shift operation, the mechanism rotates the
capstan motor in the forward direction for a constant time so that the tape is not slackened.
(4) When the cam slider reaches the position c (loading motor stoped for 250ms), the capstan motor is rotated in
the reverse direction for a constant time, and the idle gear is swung toward the S reel disc side.
Then, the loading motor rotates in reverse direction and shifts to the position III (RPS mode).
When the cam slider reaches the position III (RPS mode), the loading motor stops.
The mechanism status is as follows :
1) The No.9 guide is loaded.
2) The tension post is separated from the tape.
3) The T soft brake is turned on.
The cpastan motor rotates in the reverse direction at 7 times for SP, 21 times for SLP to feed the tape in the
REW direction, respectively. At the same time, the idle gear transmits the rotation to the S reel disc and
the S reel disc takes up the tape by the clutch mechanism.
(5) The recording speed data identified by IC601 is displayed on the Led module.
Pinch assembly (ON)
Tension lever (OFF)
No. 9 guide lever (ON)
S brake (OFF)
T brake (RPS brake)
Fig. 8-28 RPS Mode (Position III)
8-24
Samsung Electronics
[7] REC mode

<REC mode>
(1) When the [REC] button is pressed in the stop mode, the mechanism enters the REC mode.
(2) The cylinder motor starts and then the loading motor rotates in reverse direction.
The cam slider reaches the position IV (playback mode).
The tape is taken up at a constant torque. The mechanism operations are the same as those in the playback.
(3) IC601 controls the audio circuit and video circuit to set the record enable mode.
(4) Recording mute is released, thus setting the recording status. The CTL signal is output for recording.
<REC PAUSE mode>
(1) When [PAUSE] button is pressed in the REC mode, the mechanism enters the REC pause mode.
(2) IC601 controls the audio circuit and the video circuit, and releases the record enable mode and performs the
rewinding for synchronous editing.
(3) After completion of the rewinding for synchronous editing, the cam slider is in the position IV (playback
mode), the cylinder motor is rotating, and the capstan motor and the loading motor stop.
Samsung Electronics
8-25
MEMO
8-26
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
Change PIC3
PIC3 A-K,C-E
SHORT and OPEN are
normal?
YES
Is there voltage at
pin 7 of PIC1
YES
PD14,PD5,PD7
SHORT and OPEN are
normal?
YES
PFD1 is normal?
Change IC02
Change IC03
Check IC01, Q10
Change short circuited or

opened parts
Change fuse
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
Amplifier Power 26.5V

and No Power Detected
YES
IC02 A-K,C-E open

are normal?
YES
Is there voltage at
pin 6 of IC01
YES
DO5,D10,ZD10,PD17
SHORT and OPEN
are normal?
YES
PFD1 is normal?
No Power Detected
(stand by LED OFF)
NO
NO
NO
NO
Change PIC5
Check PIC1,PQ1
Change short circuited or

opened parts
Change fuse
9. Troubleshooting
9-1
9-2
End repairs
YES
Key operatious such

as STOP,PLAY,OPEN
are normal?
YES
Check the soldering

around IC601 good?
YES
Check the circuity

around IC601 reset?
YES
XT602 8MHz
oscillation is normal?
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
Is the measurement of
power with in normal value?
is the front connector properly connected?
Key Operation or
Remote Control Error
NO
Change Timer pcb IC701
YES
STOP,PLAY,OPEN
Key operatious are
normal?
Check the circuity around the swith.

check the condition of commmunication
with Main Micom
Check the soldering around the

IC601
Check the circuity around

IC601 reset
Check the circuity around the clock
Check power and front connector
CHECK
CYLINDER MOTOR
YES
CN604-12
2.5V
YES
CN604-3
5V
YES
CN604-8
12V
DRUM DOES
NOT ROTATE
NO
NO
NO
CHECK
C661, R617, C659
IC601-5
PWM OUT
CHECK 5V LINE
CHECK
12V AT PC12V LINE
IN THE POWER BLOCK
(VCR Section)
NO
CHANGE IC601
Troubleshooting
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
SEE (PB VIDEO) AUDIO MISSING

IN PLAY MODE
YES
PB-VIDEO
YES
MECHANISM
OPERATION
YES
PLAY
INDICATOR
IN THE DISPLAY
INSERT THE CASETTE

TAPE RECORDED BY
ANOTHER VCR AND
PRESS PLAY BUTTON
YES
EE-VIDEO
PLAY MODE
INOPERATIVE
NO
DOES NOT OPERATE

OR OPERATES
BUT STOP SOON
NO
NO
NO
SEE
VIDEO MISSING
IN PLAY MODE
SEE
(MECHANISM DOES NOT
OPERATE IN PLAY MODE)
CHECK TIMER
YES
PRESS PLAY KEY

IN REMOTE
CONTROL
SEE
(VIDEO MISSING IN EE MODE)
(VCR Section)
NO
CHECK
IC601, XT602
YES
SW 25Hz
IC601-24
YES
CYLINDER
ROTATION
HIGH
(END SENSOR)
IC601-74
YES
TAPE LOADING
OPERATION
LOAD A TAPE AND

PRESS PLAY BUTTON
TURN VCR POWER ON
MECHANISM DOESN'T
OPERATE IN PLAY MODE
NO
NO
LOW
NO
CHECK CN604
8pin 12V
YES
(LOAD)
IC601-38:HIGH
IC601-39:LOW
CYL FG.PG
IC601-97
CHECK CYLINDER
CHECK TAPE
(VCR Section)
NO
CHECK
START/END SENSOR (S601/S602)
IC601
Troubleshooting
9-3
9-4
CHANGE IC601
YES
PROG.SW STATE
IC601-62, 63, 64
PULSE
(S.T REEL)
IC601-98,99
YES
CAPSTAN
ROTATION
STOP MODE
DC
NO
CHECK
LOADING MOTOR
MECHANISM OR SW603
TAKE UP REEL SENSOR

SUPPLY REEL SENSOR
(PT601.PT602)
SEE
(CAPSTAN DOES NOT
ROTATE)
SEE
(AUDIO MISSING IN
RECORD MODE)
YES
REC-VIDEO
YES
REC MODE
LOAD VCR WITH A

BLANK TAPE AND
PRESS RECORD BUTTON
YES
PLAY
OPERATION
RECORD MODE
DOESN'T OPERATE
NO
EJECT
NO
SEE
(VIDEO MISSING IN
RECORD MODE)
CHANGE SW602
YES
SAFETY TAB
SEE
(PLAY MODE
DOESN'T OPERATE)
(VCR Section)
NO
CHANGE TAPE
Troubleshooting
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
CHECK
MECHANISM
YES
IC601 93pin
FG pulse
YES
CHECK CN604
5.9pin 3.2V
YES
CHECK CN604
2pin 24V?
4pin 5V?
5.9pin 35V?
YES
F.FWD
INDICATOR IN
THE DISPLAY
LOAD TAPE AND

PRESS F.FWD BUTTON
FAST FORWARD
DOESN'T OPERATE
NO
NO
NO
NO
CHECK TIMER
YES
PRESS FF
KEY IN REMOTE
CONTROL
CHECK CAPSTAN MOTOR
CHECK IC601
CHECK POWER BLOCK
(VCR Section)
NO
CHANGE IC601, XT602
CHECK IC601
YES
NOISE BAR
LOCKING
YES
IS CAPSTAN
SPEED CHANGED?
PRESS F.FWD FOR

FORWARD SEARCH
YES
PLAY
OPERATION
FWD SEARCH DOESN'T

OPERATE
NO
NO
NO
CHECK CAPSTAN
MOTOR
YES
(CONTROL PULSE)
IC601-89
CHANGE DECK
SEE
(PLAY DOESN'T OPERATE)
(VCR Section)
NO
ADJUST
A/CE HEAD
END
YES
SEARCH
OPERATION
NO
CHANGE IC601
Troubleshooting
9-5
9-6
CHANGE IC601
NO
IC601-38:LOW(0V)
IC601-39:HIGH(5V)
PRESS EJECT BUTTON
YES
TAPE DETECTED
TURN THE VCR

POWER ON AND
INSERT A TAPE
CASSETTE LOADING
MECHANISM
DOES NOT OPERATE
YES
NO
YES
CN604 8pin 12V?
YES
CST IN MODE
IC601-75:HIGH(5V)
IC601-74:LOW(0V)
CHECK
CASSETT LOADING
MECHANISM
NO
IC601-38:HIGH(5V)
IC601-39:LOW(0V)
(VCR Section)
YES
NO
NO
CHANGE IC601
CHECK
DM B+ LINE
CHECK
START/END SENSOR (S601/S602)
IC601
CHECK
IIC CLK, DATA
LINE
CHECK
TM401,
ANTTENNA IN
NO
NO
CHANGE IC301
YES
IIC CLK, DATA

IC301-68,69
CHECK
IC801-3 TO
TM401-24 LINE
YES
VIDEO SIGNAL
TM401-24
NO
NO
CHECK
TV CONNECTION.
YES
VIDEO SIGNAL
JC801-19
YES
VIDEO SIGNAL
IC301-61
YES
VIDEO SIGNAL
IC801-3
YES
TUNER MODE
OPERATION
NO
YES
NO
PLACE VCR IN STOP MODE
VIDEO MISSING IN
EE MODE
CHECK
C833, R807, Q810
VIDEO SIGNAL
IC801-5
NO
CHECK JC802,
VIDEO SIGNAL
APPLY VIDEO SIGNAL

TO REAR VIDEO INPUT JACK AND
SET TO AUX MODE BY TV VIEW BUTTON.
(VCR Section)
Troubleshooting
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
CHECK VIDEO HEAD
YES
FM-VIDEO
IC301-88, 94
YES
FM-VIDEO
IC301-21
PLACE THE VCR

RECORD MODE
YES
VIDEO EE MODE
OPERATION
VIDEO MISSING IN
RECORD MODE
NO
NO
NO
CHANGE IC301
CHECK IC601-4
5V
IC301-80
SEE PAGE 5-6

(VCR Section)
YES
CHANGE
IC301
CHANGE IC301
NO
VIDEO
IC301-61
YES
VIDEO
IC301-79
YES
VIDEO FM
IC301-21
PLACE THE VCR PLAY MODE
YES
VIDEO EE MODE
OPERATION
VIDEO MISSING IN
PLAY MODE
YES
NO
NO
NO
CHECK Q810
NO
VIDEO
IC801-19
CHECK
Q3Q7
YES
H'D SW
IC301-70
SEE PAGE 5-6

(VCR Section)
YES
NO
NO
CHECK Q811
VIDEO
JC802
CHECK
VIDEO HEAD
CHECK IC601-24
CHECK VIDEO
OUT LINE
Troubleshooting
9-7
9-8
CHANGE IC301
YES
COLOR
IC301-59
YES
COLOR
IC301-58
YES
(VIDEO IN)
RECORD MODE
COLOR MISSING IN
RECORD MODE
NO
NO
NO
CHECK C340
CHANGE IC301
YES
CHECK XT301
NO
NOTE: XT301 - Always (4.433619MHz)

XT302 - Option (3.579545MHz)
SEE PAGE 5-6

(VIDEO MISSING IN RECORD
MODE)
(VCR Section)
CHANGE XT301
COLOR
IC301-25
YES
FM-ENV
IC301-21
COLOR MISSING IN
PLAY MODE
NO
NO
YES
CHANGE
IC301
NO
COLOR
IC301-65
YES
CHECK XT301
YES
SW 25Hz
IC301-70
NO
NO
YES
NOTE: XT3X1 - Always (4.433619MHz)

XT3X2 - Option (3.579545MHz)
SEE PAGE 5-7

(VIDEO MISSING IN PLAY MODE)
(VCR Section)
CHECK R335, C380
CHANGE XT301
CHECK IC601-29
NO
Troubleshooting
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
CHANGE
IC6P01
YES
(STB, CLK, DATA)

IC6P01-9, 10, 11
NO
OSC IN
IC6P01-6
YES
2fsc IN
IC6P01-2
OSD PICTURE MISSING
NO
NO
NO
CHECK IC6P01
2fsc : 8.86MHz
OSC IN : 5~10MHz
CHECK IC601-8, 6, 7
CHECK L6P05, C6P04, C6P05
(VCR Section)
CHANGE IC6P01
YES
IC6P01-9, 10, 11
(STB, CLK, DATA)
YES
IC601-72 "L"
YES
IC6P01-8 "L"
(SYNC JUDGE)
YES
SELECT LINE MODE

WITHOUT INPUT SIGNAL
BLUE MISSING IN
STOP MODE
NO
NO
NO
CHECK IC6P01
YES
VIDEO SIGNAL
IC6P01-24
CHECK IC601-8, 6, 7
CHECK IC6P01-8 TO IC601-72
(VCR Section)
NO
CHECK OSD VIDEO IN LINE
Troubleshooting
9-9
9-10
CHECK
DVD BLOCK
NO
CHANGE
IC803
YES
IC803-2, 5
AUDIO SIGNAL
INPUT
NO
DVD
YES
IC803-15
AUDIO SIGNAL
YES
Q891B
Q890B
CHECK
L803, L804,JC802
IC801-1, 13
AUDIO SIGNAL
INPUT
TUNER
TV VIEW
MODE
PLACE VCR IN STOP

MODE
AUDIO MISSING IN
EE MODE
(VCR
Section)
YES
NO
AUX
YES
NO
CHECK TM401
YES
TM401-2
AUDIO SIGNAL
NO
CHECK
C801, C807, IC4N01
IC801-2, 12
AUDIO SIGNAL
INPUT
(VCR Section)
CHECK C409
CHECK
L815, L816
CHECK CYLINDER
YES
IC501-26
AUDIO FM
YES
IC501-28
AUDIO FM
YES
IC501-78, 80
AUDIO SIGNAL
HIFI
MISSING AUDIO
CHECK
AUDIO MISSING
IN EE MODE
AUDIO MISSING IN
REC MODE
NO
NO
NO
MONO
MONO
CHECK IC501
YES
IC501-24, 27:5V
CHECK
R545, CHANGE IC501
CHECK
D501, R570, R571
YES
CHECK INPUT
AUDIO SIGNAL
(VCR Section)
NO
NO
CHECK
PC 5V LINE
CHECK JC801, JC802
Troubleshooting
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
CHECK A/CE HEAD
YES
Q3A03
OSCILLATION
YES
IC301-3
MIX SIGNAL
(AUDIO+70KHz)
YES
IC301-99
AUDIO SIGNAL
YES
IC301-11
AUDIO SIGNAL
YES
IC301-15
AUDIO SIGNAL
YES
CHECK AUDIO MISSING

IN PB MODE
MONO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
CHECK Q3A02
CHECK R3A04
CHECK IC301
CHECK
C3A01, R3A26
CHANGE IC501
NO
IC501-6
AUDIO SIGNAL
CHECK
PB MODE
YES
YES
CHECK Q3A06-BASE
REC "H"
CHECK
R3A28, R3A60, C3A24
MONO
CHECK
C3A01, R3A25, L3A01
AUDIO SIGNAL
YES
IC301-9
AUDIO SIGNAL
CHANGE
IC501
YES
IC501-30
AUDIO FM(MIXED)
HIFI
AUDIO SELECT
PLACE THE VCR IN PB MODE
CHECK "AUDIO
MISSING IN EE MODE"
AUDIO MISSING
IN PB MODE
NO
NO
CHECK ACE HEAD

C3A15, C3A16, R3A06, R3A07,
R3A08 AND CHANGE IC301
CHECK
IC501-40(A.H D SW)
C513, R503 AND
CHANGE CYLINDER OR
IC501
(VCR Section)
Troubleshooting
9-11
9-12
CHANGE
IC601
YES
CHECK
CTL PULSE AC
LEVEL (SP. SLP:
OVER 1Vp-p)
YES
IC601-89
CTL PULSE
YES
IC601-93
C-FG
PLAY
NO SERVO LOCK
NO
NO
NO
CHECK
A/CE HEAD
CHECK
CN604-1
(VCR Section)
CHECK
CAPSTAN MOTOR
YES
CN604-5
2.6V
YES
CN604-9
3.2V
PLACE THE VCR

IN PLAY MODE
YES
CN604-3
AL 5V
YES
CN604-2
15V
CAPSTAN DOES
NOT ROTATE
NO
NO
NO
NO
CHECK
R615, C606, R671
YES
CN601-3
OUTPUT(PWM)
CHECK R607
YES
IC601-10
OUTPUT(PWM)
CHECK
5V AT AL5V LINE
IN THE POWER BLOCK
CHECK
B+ IN THE POWER BLOCK
(VCR Section)
NO
NO
CHECK
IC601
CHANGE
IC601
Troubleshooting
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
Check open state from

FIC1 to pick-up.
Yes
FIC1-27, 28 output
are normal?
Yes
FE in RIC1-40
is within specified range?
No focus incoming
No
(FE Waveform)
No
(DVD Section)
Check FIC1.
Check RIC1 and A, B, C, D input.
No
(DVD Section)
No
(SLD Waveform)
Check the Sled Motor and connection
Yes
SLED+, SLEDFIC1-32, 33 output are

normal?
Yes
FIC1-18(SLD)
output is normal?
(1.7V ~ 1.8V)
No pick-up home positing
Check FIC1
Check ZIC1
Troubleshooting
9-13
9-14
LD out pick-up replace.
Yes
Current exceeds 0.1A?
Yes
Divide RQ1 emitter terminal

voltage and 5V real voltage
difference into 10ohm.
Yes
RIC1-21 is 5V?
NO LD CD ON
No
No
(DVD Section)
Open check in related circuit.
Check ZIC1
See "Fine Seek Check"
Yes
occurs in search range?
Yes
Actual velocity occurs

at FIC1-32, 33 terminal?
Yes
No
No
No
No
Focus On?
Check FIC1 peripheral circuit.
Check RIC1 peripheral circuit.
(DVD Section)
(MIRR Waveform)
Actual velocity occurs

at FIC1-18 terminal?
Yes
MIRR, RIC1-27
output is normal?
No Search Operation
No
Troubleshooting
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
No
No
No
Yes
No
Check RIC1-39 terminal.
No
(TRD Waveform)
Check DCN1 and pick-up.
Yes
FIC1-29, 30(T-, T+)

terminal outputs are
normal?
Yes
ZIC1-169(TRD)
output is normal?
Time out due to many jump counts.
Check RIC1 Peripheral curcuit.
(DVD Section)
Check DECK MECHA.
Check ZIC1 peripheral circuit.
Yes
Pick-up transfer smooth.
Yes
TE is within
2V and 3V?
Yes
Track incomming is
delayed?
No
FINE SEEK MIRR

signal (RIC1-27) is missing?
FINE SEEK Check
Yes
No
No
Yes
RIC1-52, 53 output
are normal?
Yes
Check FIC1 soldering and power.
Check SIC1, ZIC1.
(FG Waveform)
No
Check RIC1 peripheral

circuit and A, B, C, D.
No
Check RIC1 soldering and power.
Check path to RIC1 and ZIC1.
After resoldering ZIC1.
Check or replace disc motor.
Yes
SIC3-44 signal
SS is NORMAL ?
Yes
FIC1-7(FG) output
is normal?
(SPD Waveform)
SPD_SENS output is normal? No

(ZIC1-206)
Yes
RIC1-63 output
is normal?
(DVD Section)
Input of
No
RFINN, FRINP signal is
normal? (ZIC1-172,
173)
(RF SUM Waveform)
Abnormal rotation of
disc motor
Troubleshooting
9-15
9-16
Check signal line state from

FIC1-34, 35 to tray motor.
Yes
Check FIC1-34, 35
output at TM+, TM-
Yes
ZIC1-147, 149 is
Open ; "L", "L" ?
Close ; "H", "H"?
No Tray open/close
(OPEN Waveform)
No
No
(DVD Section)
Check SIC3.
Micom (ZIC1) error.
Check CN1 peripheral

soldering shot.
Yes
Base terminal level

of AQ3, AQ6
are "L"?
Yes
AIC4-1, 7 output
is normal?
Yes
CHECK DAIC2
7, 8pin output is
normal?
Yes
DAIC2-1, 2, 3
IS NORMAL?
No
(DVD Section)
No
No
(Vout Waveform)
No
(DATA 0 Waveform)
CD/VCD/DVD L/R output error

(Mixed Audio output)
Check VCR-MICOM mate
Check AIC4 peripheral circuit.
Check ZIC1-118
(AMCLK)
Check DAIC3-18, 19, 20 output.
Troubleshooting
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
No
(AVJ2 Waveform)
No
(DVD Section)
Check the Connection of CN1and

the troubleshooting guide of VCR BLOCK
Yes
AIC 7, 8 output
is normal?
Yes
LINE output is
normal?
Headphone output error
Check the circuit of DAIC2
Check LINE- output error.
Check the connection of s-video cable
Yes
S-SACK output
is normal?
Yes
VIC1-29, 31, 33 output

is normal?
Yes
Did the screen

select with the s-video
S-Video output error
No
No
No
(DVD Section)
Check the connection between

VIC1 and S-JACK
Check the cincuit of ZIC1, VIC1
Change a screen set
Troubleshooting
9-17
9-18
No
No
No
(DVD Section)
Check the connection component cable
Yes
JACK1 output level

is normal?
Yes
VIC1-21, 23, 25pin

output is normal?
Yes
Did the screen

select with the component
Y/Pr/Pb output error
Check the connection between

VIC1 and JACK1
Check the circuit ZIC1 and VIC1
Change a sceen set
Check the troubleshooting

guide of VCR BLOCK
Yes
check the connection

is CN1
Yes
CN1-26pin
input is normal?
Yes
ZIC1-159pin
CVBS output is normal?
Yes
ZIC1-VDD 1.8V
VDD 3.3 has normal lovel?
CVBS output error
No
No
No
No
Check the circuit of ZIC
Check the circuit of PIC2,3
Check the connection

Flat cable
Check the connection between pin

159 in ZIC1 and pin 26 in CN101
(DVD Section)
Troubleshooting
Samsung Electronics
Samsung Electronics
Check the connection speaker
Yes
check speaker output

jack
Yes
check DAIC3-PWM
output is normal?
Yes
check DAC11-21pin
level "H"
Yes
check volume
irdication appear
Yes
DAIC3 output is normal?
Yes
line-audio output
is normal?
Yes
PIC3-2pin 3.3V
output is normal?
Yes
POWER_CN1-1pin 29.5V
output is normal?
5.1CH. Speaker Error
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
check the circuit of PIC3
Check the circuit of smps
check the circuit of Digital Amp IC
check the circuit of DAIC3
Check the circuit Digital Amp IC

between speaker connection
Check the communication of

DAIC3-11, 12 pin and the
VCR MICOM
Check the connection of

ZIC1, DAIC3
check the troubleshooting guide of

line-out audio
(DVD Section)
Troubleshooting
9-19
Troubleshooting
MEMO
9-20
Samsung Electronics
Pick-up & I/V Amp
FIC1
(FAN8728)
Motor Driver
VIC1
(LA73054)
Video Amp 6CH S/W
DAIC2
(PCM1742KE)
2CH Audio DAC
RIC1
(SP3723B)
RF_IC
AUX IN
AUX OUT
FM/AM ANT
FM/AM Tuner
(H-5410/5320)
ANT
TV
TM401 TV Tuner
PACIC1(TAS5111)
PASIC1/PAFIC1/PASIC2(TAS5112)
IC PWM Modulator
DAIC3
(NSP6241)
IC PWM Modulator
Feed Motor
Super
Component
Headphones
5.1Ch Speakers
DECK ASS'Y (DP-9)
Disk Motor
Scart Jack
10. Block Diagram
ZIC1
(VADDIS6E)
A/V Decoder
ZIC5 (24C021)
EEPROM
IC801
(4053B)
Output Signal Switch
IC501
(AN3663FBP)
Hi-FI Audio Processor
DAIC6
(AK5353)
AD_Converter
IC301
(LA71750M)
A/V Processor
ZIC2 64MB SD RAM
ZIC4
(TC74VHCT125A)
Level Shifter
ZIC3
(39VF160)
64MB Flash Memory
IC601
(MN101D06F)
VCR Main Micom
IC603 EEPROM
IC701
(PT6961)
LED-DRIVE_IC
STEREO
(DT701)
Samsung Electronics
This Document can not be used without Samsungs authorization
10-1
Block Diagram
MEMO
10-2
Samsung Electronics
11. Wiring Diagram
VCR MAIN
DVD MAIN
S4
S.M.P.S.
Samsung Electronics
11-1
Wiring Diagram
MEMO
11-2
Samsung Electronics
12. Schematic Diagrams

Block Identification of Main PCB- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-2
12-1 S.M.P.S.-1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-3
12-2 S.M.P.S.-2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-4
12-3 Function-Timer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-5
12-4 Volume - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-6
Note
For schematic Diagram
- Resistors are in ohms, 1/8W unless otherwise noted.
Special note :
Most semiconductor devices are electrostatically sensitive and therefore require the special handling techniques described under the
electrostatically sensitive (ES) devices section of this service manual.
Note :
Do not use the part number shown on this drawing for ordering. The correct part number is shown in the parts list (may be slightly
different or amended since this drawing was prepared).
VCR Main PCB

12-5 Power Drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-7
12-6 Logic - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-8
12-7 A/V - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-9
12-8 Hi-Fi- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-10
12-9 AM/FM Receiver - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-11
12-10 Input-Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-12
12-11 TM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-13
12-12 A2/NICAM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-14
12-13 SECAM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-15
12-14 OSD/VPS/PDC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-16
Important safety notices :

Components identified with the mark
Use only the same type.
have the special characteristics for safety. When replacing any of these components.
DVD Main PCB

12-15 DVD Micom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-17
12-16 DVD DVI (CHT-600 Only)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-18
12-17 DVD Servo- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-19
12-18 DVD Audio/Video Interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-20
12-19 Digital Amp - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
12-21
Samsung Electronics
12-1
Schematic Diagrams
Block Identification of Main PCB
VCR MAIN PCB

LA
72
72
LA
0M
71
75
75
71
LA
LA
0M
64
6M
6M
64
uPD78F4928GF-3BA
uPD78F4928GF-3BA
<Conductor Side>
<Component Side>
DVD MAIN PCB
<Component Side>
12-2
Samsung Electronics
Schematic Diagrams
12-1 S.M.P.S.-1
Samsung Electronics
12-3
Schematic Diagrams
12-2 S.M.P.S.-2
12-4
Samsung Electronics
Schematic Diagrams
12-3 Function-Timer
Samsung Electronics
12-5
Schematic Diagrams
12-4 Volume
12-6
Samsung Electronics
Schematic Diagrams
12-5 Power Drive
Samsung Electronics
12-7
Schematic Diagrams
12-6 Logic
12-8
Samsung Electronics
Schematic Diagrams
12-7 A/V
Samsung Electronics
12-9
Schematic Diagrams
12-8 Hi-Fi
12-10
Samsung Electronics
Schematic Diagrams
12-9 AM/FM Receiver
Samsung Electronics
12-11
Schematic Diagrams
12-10 Input-Output
12-12
Samsung Electronics
Schematic Diagrams
12-11 TM
Samsung Electronics
12-13
Schematic Diagrams
12-12 A2/NICAM
12-14
Samsung Electronics
Schematic Diagrams
12-13 SECAM
Samsung Electronics
12-15
Schematic Diagrams
12-14 OSD/VPS/PDC
12-16
Samsung Electronics
Schematic Diagrams
12-15 DVD Micom
Samsung Electronics
12-17
Schematic Diagrams
12-16 DVD DVI (CHT-600 Only)
12-18
Samsung Electronics
Schematic Diagrams
12-17 DVD Servo
Samsung Electronics
12-19
Schematic Diagrams
12-18 DVD Audio/Video Interface
12-20
Samsung Electronics
Schematic Diagrams
12-19 Digital Amp
Samsung Electronics
12-21
Schematic Diagrams
MEMO
12-22
Samsung Electronics

Samsung cht-500 cht-2020 dvd-cm500 Training PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Samsung cht-500 cht-2020 dvd-cm500 Training PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DVD-VCR COMBINATION

Main Unit ; DVD-CM500

10. Block Diagram

This Service Manual is a property of Samsung Electronics Co .,Ltd.

Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. JAN. 2004

IMPORTANT SERVICE GUIDE

VCR MAIN PCB

HOW TO EJECT THE CASSETTE TAPE

Any measurements not within the limits specified

Fig. 1-1 AC Leakage Test

Fig. 1-2 Insulation Resistance Test

5) Components, parts, and/or wiring that appear to

1-2 Servicing Precautions

1-2-1 General Servicing Precautions

(4) An insulation tube or tape is sometimes used and

1-2-2 Insulation Checking Procedure

Note : Refer to the Safety Precautions section ground

1-3 ESD Precautions

(2) After removing an electrical assembly equipped

1-4 Handling the optical pick-up

The following method is recommended.

Be sure to put on a wrist strap grounded to the

1-5 Pick-up disassembly and reassembly

1) Remove the power cord.

1) Replace the Pick-up.

SOLDER LAND 2 POINTS SHORT

Single Layer : 4.7GByte

Dual Side Single Layer : 9.5GByte

Dual Layer : 8.5GByte

2-1-2 DVD Types

2-2 DVD-Video Fromat

2-2-2 Audio & Video Specifications

Max. 500 Lines

Max. 250 Lines

Max. 9.8Mbps (variable)

16, 20, 24Bit/48, 96KHz

2-2-3 Detailed Feature

Application of the MPEG-2 compression technology.

MPEG-2 (Variable compression : Max. 1/40)

MPEG-1 (Fixed compression : Max. 1/140)

- Fast movements are jagged, and unnatural

High quality surround audio.

Dolby Digital compatible Audio Mode

Audio Dubbing - Max. 8 Languages

4:3 Pan & Scan

4:3 Letter Box

Regional Code & Macrovision

Adoptation of the Macrovision System disables the copying on to other media.

DVD-Video Authoring Process

2 Stereo audio inputs, RCA connector, -8dBm, 47Kohm

2 composite video inputs, RCA connector, 75ohm, 1Vp-p

Antenna or CATV Input, F-Connector, 75ohm

1 Stereo audio output, RCA Connector, -8dbm, 1.5Kohm

1 Composite video output, RCA Connector, 75ohm, 1Vp-p

VIDEO (DVD only)

1 S-Video output, S-Connector, 75ohm, Y=1.0Vp-p, C=0.286Vp-p

1/2-inch VHS system, 4 rotary head helical scanning;

Normal : 1 track, Hi-Fi : 2 track

T-180 tape : SP 3 hours, SLP 9 hours

T-120 tape : <2 minutes>

WOW & FLUTTER

Less than 0.005% (Hi-Fi)

CD, CD-R, CD-R/W, DVD-Video, CD-Digital Audio (5 and 3.5)